Iv-Series-Pcsoft Um 207GB 244003 e 1122-4 PDF

207GB
1
Vision Sensor
Getting Started Installation and Connection Basic Operation Settings Navigator
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
IV Series
Users Manual
(PC Software)
Read this manual before use. After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
(Setting the Judgment Condition)
Operating/Adjusting Useful Features/ Various Functions Simulator Controlling with the Input/Output Line Specifications Status Table, Troubleshooting
Introduction
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance. Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these messages carefully.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.
It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
It indicates additional information on proper operation.
It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information. It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.
Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited. (2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice. (3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual. (4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit. (5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks of their respective companies.
Safety Information for IV Series
Safety Information for IV Series

General Precautions
yyDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body. yyThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
yyYou must verify that the IV Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance before the start and the operation of the IV Series. yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of a problem occurring.
yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV Series if it is used in manner that differs from the IV Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the IV Series are modified by yourself. yyWhen the IV Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment. yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals. yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.
Safety precautions on LED product

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result. yyDo not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam. yyDo not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is disassembled. yyDo not direct the beam at people or into areas where people might be present. yyBe careful of the path of the LED beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be exposed to the specular or diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure. yyInstall this product so that the path of the LED beam is not as the same height as that of human eye.
207GB
Important Instructions
Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV Series and to ensure that it is used properly.
Precautions on use
yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a product damage. yyUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
yyFor instructions yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost. yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction. yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit. yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable, wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth. yyFor external master image registration If the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the internal sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for 100,000 times. yyFor automatic focus function yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation. This will not activate during the operation. yyFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program, set [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] to [Common] for extending the life-span. yyDo not apply shock or vibration during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV Series in an abnormal condition could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction. Contact our office for repair. yyIf water or debris enters the IV Series. yyIf the IV Series is dropped or the case is damaged. yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV Series.
- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -
Precautions on installation
yyTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction. yyOutdoors yyAltitude above 2000 m yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a malfunction may occur. yyMount the sensor onto the insulated attached mounting adapter. yyGround the FG cable (drain cable) of the sensor. yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed. yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible. yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic field (such as solenoid or chopper). yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line. yyFor power supply yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC power supply configured with an isolation transformer. yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground terminal. yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration. yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.
Precautions on Regulations and Standards

For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/ IV-2000M/IV-2000MA
UL Certification
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product. yyUL File No. E301717 yyCategory NRKH, NRKH7 Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product. yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code). yyPower supply/ External input/ Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only. yyUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A. yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)
CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) zz

yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN60947-5-2, Class A EMS: EN60947-5-2 yyThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m. Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) zz

yyApplicable Standard: EN62471
Software License Agreement

NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS AGREEMENT) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE [IV-H1] (THIS SOFTWARE), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. Definition 1.1 use or using means to access, install, download, copy or otherwise benefit from using the functionality of this Software. 1.2 This Software means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE. 2. Grant of License. Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Software on all computers in order to use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only. 3. Restrictions. 3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify or add any function to this Software. 3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software. 3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software. 3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise redistribute this Software to any third parties. 4. Intellectual Property Rights. Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein. 5. Disclaimer. Keyence is licensing this Software to you AS IS and without any warranty of any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages, claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software. 6. Termination. 6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and the copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return this Software to us. 6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this Software in your possession or control. 6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach of any term of this Agreement. 7. Governing Law. 7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Japan without regards to the principles of conflicts of law. 7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.
Version of the IV Series
Version of the IV Series

You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) and IV-Navigator (IV-H1) from the KEYENCE web site. Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method. URL : http://www.keyence.com/
Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

Version R1.00.00 R1.01.00 R1.10.00 The initial version. The processing time has been speeded up. The processing time and the response time to program switching input have been speeded up. This is the version of this document. The following functions have been added. yyLogic output yyTotal status NG output yyRUN output yyFTP client function yyField network (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET) Description
R2.00.00
IV-Navigator (IV-H1)
Version R1.00.00 R1.01.00 R1.02.00 The initial version. Compatibility with German. Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional). The following functions have been added. yyAddition of the IV-Simulator function yyAddition of the image capture function to the o peration of the [Save Image] button yyAddition of the [Size] selection function to Remove Outline yyAddition of the [Display Master Image] button to Tool Auto Tuning yyAddition of the [Language] button (language selection) to the Activation Menu screen This is the version of this document. Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean. IVP-Convertor has been added. Description
R1.10.00
R2.00.00
Structure of This Manual
Structure of This Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

Getting Started This chapter explains the system configuration and overview of IV Series, package contents, and names and functions of each part. This chapter explains the procedures for installing and connecting the sensor and for setting up the PC. This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow of the IV Series. This chapter explains how to set the sensors using the Settings Navigator. This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IV Series.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
Installation and Connection Basic Operation
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)
Operating/Adjusting Useful Features/ Various Functions Simulator Controlling with the Input/Output Line Specifications
This chapter explains the useful and detailed features. This chapter explains the functions and operations of the Simulator. This chapter explains how the input and output terminals control each operation. This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.
Appendices
This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.
Contents
Contents
Introduction Symbols Cautions Safety Information for IV Series..............................1 General Precautions............................................1 Safety precautions on LED product.....................1 Important Instructions..............................................2 Precautions on use..............................................2 Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs..................................................................2 Precautions on installation...................................3 Precautions on Regulations and Standards............4 For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/ IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA............4 UL Certification.................................................4 CE Marking.......................................................4 Software License Agreement...............................5 Version of the IV Series........................................... 6 Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)................................................ 6 IV-Navigator (IV-H1)............................................. 6 Structure of This Manual.........................................7 Contents..................................................................8
Chapter 2 Installation and Connection

Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2 Checking the view and installed distance.........2-2 Mounting the sensor.........................................2-4 Mounting the mounting adapter.....................2-4 Mounting on the wall..............................2-4 Mounting from the jig side......................2-4 Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter.....................................2-4 Unmounting the sensor.....................................2-5 Mounting the attachment..................................2-6 Using the dome attachment...........................2-6 Mounting the dome attachment.............2-6 Installed distance of the dome attachment.............................2-6 Using the polarizing filter attachment............2-7 Cables..................................................................2-8 Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor....2-8 Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor.......................................................2-10 Input circuit..................................................2-10 No-voltage input (When the NPN output is selected).....2-10 Voltage input (When the PNP output is selected)......2-10 Output circuit...............................................2-10 When the NPN output is selected........2-10 When the PNP output is selected........2-10 Connecting the sensor and the PC.................2-11 Connecting directly .....................................2-11 Connecting via network...............................2-11 Connecting the Ethernet cable....................2-12 Setting up the PC...............................................2-14 Required environment for the PC to be connected..................................................2-14 OS...............................................................2-14 Hardware.....................................................2-14 Operating conditions....................................2-14 Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...................2-14 Installation destination of the software (reference)......................................................2-15 Deleting the software (uninstall)......................2-15 Changing the PC settings (IP address setting).........................................2-16 For Windows 7.............................................2-16 For Windows XP..........................................2-16
Chapter 1 Getting Started

System Configuration...........................................1-2 Basic configurations of IV-Series......................1-2 Connecting the PC and single sensor...........1-2 Connecting the PC and multiple sensors......1-3 Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4 IV Series...........................................................1-4 Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...............1-4 Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)....1-5 Judgment processing flow................................1-6 Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8 Sensor...............................................................1-8 Optional parts for the sensor.............................1-8 Dome attachment..........................................1-8 Polarized visible light filter attachment..........1-8 Infrared polarization filter attachment............1-8 Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - stranded wire)...........................1-9 Mounting adapter...........................................1-9 Front cover (for replacement)........................1-9 Bracket..........................................................1-9 Communication cables....................................1-10 Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-10 NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).......................................1-10 IV Software.....................................................1-10 Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-11 Sensor.............................................................1-11 Name and function of each part of the sensor............................................1-11 Operation of the indicator light.............1-12
Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2 Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4 Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5 Operation flow when the power is turned on.....3-5 Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)................3-6 Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)............3-6 Starting the IV-Navigator...............................3-6 Searching for a sensor to be connected........3-7
Contents
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address......................................................3-8 Operation for initial startup of the sensor..........3-9 Resetting to the Factory Default Settings...........3-10 Initializing the sensor......................................3-10 Basic Operation for Tools...................................3-11 Operating the image tool bar..........................3-11 Editing the tool window...................................3-12
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Settings Navigator................................................4-2 Flow in the Settings Navigator..........................4-2 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3 Starting the Settings Navigator.........................4-3 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow....4-4 Finishing the Settings Navigator.......................4-5 Finishing by completing all steps...................4-5 Finishing without completing the steps..........4-5 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)....4-6 Setting the Image Optimization.........................4-6 Main screen for the Image Optimization...........4-7 Setting the Trigger Options...............................4-8 Settings for the Trigger Options.....................4-8 Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-10 Brightness Adjustment....................................4-11 Brightness Adjustment settings...................4-11 Adjusting brightness....................................4-12 Focus Adjustment...........................................4-13 Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type.................................4-13 Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type.............................4-14 Extended Functions for the Image Optimization...................................4-16 Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization................................4-16 Imaging Area...............................................4-17 Digital Zoom (monochrome type only).........4-18 Color filters (color type only)........................4-18 Lighting........................................................4-19 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)........4-20 Main screen for the Master Registration.........4-20 Registering the master image.........................4-21 Registering the Live image as a master image............................................4-21 Master registration from the image history in the sensor....................4-22 Master registration using the file saved in the PC................................4-23 When using batch backup files (*.iva)....4-23 When using image capture files (*.ivp)...................................................4-24 Extended Functions for the Master Registration...................................4-25 Items of extended functions for the Master Registration...............................4-25 Brightness Correction..................................4-25
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28 Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose........................................4-28 Types of tools..................................................4-28 Main screen for the Tool settings....................4-30 Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool...........4-31 Adding a tool................................................4-31 Editing a tool................................................4-31 Copying a tool..............................................4-32 Deleting a tool..............................................4-32 Outline tool......................................................4-34 Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-34 Setting the Outline tool................................4-35 Setting a search region........................4-37 Setting a sensitivity..............................4-37 Settings for removing outlines.............4-38 Setting a tool name..............................4-38 Extended Functions for the Outline tool......4-39 Rotation Range....................................4-39 Margin..................................................4-40 Search Algorithm.................................4-40 Color Area/Area tool........................................4-42 Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool.....4-42 Setting the Color Area/Area tool..................4-44 Mask settings.......................................4-47 Setting the upper limit..........................4-48 Setting the tool name...........................4-49 Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool..............................4-50 Advanced settings for color extraction (for color type only)..............................4-51 Fixed Reference Area..........................4-51 Position Adjustment tool..................................4-53 Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool........................4-54 Setting the position adjustment tool.............4-55 Setting a search region........................4-57 Setting a sensitivity..............................4-57 Settings for disabling outlines..............4-58 Extended Functions for the Position Adjustment tool........................4-59 Rotation Range....................................4-59 Margin..................................................4-59 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)...4-60 Main screen for the Output Assignment..........4-60 Setting range of the Output Assignment.........4-61 Default value........................................4-61 Setting the Output Assignment.......................4-61 Extended functions for the Output Assignment....................................4-62 Extended functions items for the Output Assignment..................................................4-62 Setting the Total Status Conditions.................4-63 Setting Logics.................................................4-64
Contents
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2 Turning on the power and starting an operation.........................................5-2 Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation...........................................................5-2 Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]........5-3 Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program]..................................................5-4 Main screen in [Run] / [Program]......................5-4 Enlarging the image display..............................5-6 Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed......................................................5-6 Selecting the tool from the status gauge....................................5-6 Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image..........................5-6 Selecting a display method for tools.................5-7 Display methods for tools..............................5-7 For color type.........................................5-7 For monochrome type............................5-8 Displaying the statistical information...............5-10 Displaying the statistical information...........5-10 Hiding the statistical information..................5-11 Displaying the tool information........................5-12 Displaying the tool information....................5-12 Hiding the tool information...........................5-13 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14 Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................................5-15 Using the images taken in the Test mode......................................5-15 Using the image history saved in the sensor............................................5-15 Using the image files saved in the PC....5-15 Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-16 The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.......5-16 Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning..................5-17 Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning..........................5-19 Register the images taken with the sensor....5-19 Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor.........5-21 Registering the image files saved in the PC..........................................................5-23 Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning.................5-26 Confirming the OK/NG images....................5-26 Deleting the OK/NG images........................5-26 Confirming the registration results in the test mode..................................................5-27 Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information...............5-27 Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-29 Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target....................5-29 Imaging the target widely.............................5-29 Adjusting the installed distance (WD)....5-29 Using the digital zooming function.......5-29
10
Correcting the distorted images due to the installation..............................................5-30 Achieving adequate image brightness.........5-30 If brightness cannot be adjusted in the Automatic Brightness Adjustment....5-30 If brightness cannot be adjusted due to uneven brightness....................5-30 Achieving good focus..................................5-31 If good focus cannot be achieved by the Automatic Focus Adjustment.........5-31 Reducing the image blur..............................5-31 Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface...............................................5-32 Using the Automatic Brightness Adjustment...........................................5-32 Using the dome attachment.................5-32 Using the polarizing filter attachment....5-32 Installing the sensor at an angle..........5-32 Adjusting the color tint (for color type only).5-33 Reducing the effect of illumination variation....... 5-33 Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position............................................................5-33 Tool settings.........................................5-33 Processing during an operation...........5-33 Stabilizing the position adjustment..................5-34 Basic adjustments................................5-34 If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes unstable.............5-34 If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines................................................5-34 If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected..........................................5-35 Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-35 Basic adjustments................................5-35 If the outline cannot be detected when the target becomes out of position.............5-35 If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target......................................5-35 If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected...............................................5-36 If the match rate difference between the high and low-quality-targets is small....5-36 If the outline of the target cannot be detected...............................................5-36 Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool................5-36 Basic adjustments................................5-36 If the color you wish to judge cannot be extracted..............................................5-36 If the area search becomes unstable due to unwanted colors being extracted.....5-36 Shortening the Processing Time........................5-37 For the processing time..................................5-37 Flow of the internal process.................5-37 Shortening the imaging processing time.........5-38 Selecting the tool............................................5-38 Shortening the processing time of each tool...5-38 Shortening the processing time of the Outline
Contents
tool...............................................................5-38 Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool..............................................5-39 Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment...................................................5-39
Chapter 6 Useful Features/Various Functions

List of the Useful Features...................................6-2 Useful features while running............................6-2 Useful features during installation/adjustment....6-3 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-6 Overview of the program functions...................6-6 Things can be performed with the program functions............................................................6-6 Preparing the program functions.......................6-7 Preparation flow.............................................6-7 Preparation procedures.................................6-7 Using the program functions (changing over).................................................6-9 When switching the program in the main screen in [Run]................................6-9 When switching the program in the Program Details screen...........................6-9 When switching the program by the external input.........................................6-10 Displaying the Program Details screen........... 6-11 Editing a program name..................................6-12 Copying a program.........................................6-12 Importing a program........................................6-13 Initializing a program.......................................6-14 Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG).............6-15 Displaying the Sensor's internal image history screen..................................................6-16 Displaying from the main screen in [Run]....................................................6-16 Displaying from the main screen in [Program].............................................6-16 Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-17 Saving all the image histories individually.......6-18 Backing up the image history in a batch.........6-19 Clearing the saved images.............................6-19 Changing the logging conditions of the image history.............................................6-20 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images............6-21 Saving the sensor settings or the image history.............................................6-21 Backing up in a batch..................................6-21 Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually........................6-22 Saving procedure.................................6-22 Confirming the saving destination of an image..............................................6-22 Changing the saving destination of an image .............................................6-22 Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor.......................................................6-23 Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-25
Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor..........................................................6-26 Input Settings..................................................6-26 Output Settings...............................................6-27 I/O Monitor......................................................6-28 I/O Polarity......................................................6-28 Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor..........................................................6-30 Advanced settings for the sensor....................6-30 [Environmental] tab......................................6-30 [FTP] tab......................................................6-30 [Setup Adjustment] tab................................6-30 [Backup] tab.................................................6-31 [Initialize/Update] tab...................................6-31 [Sensor Information] tab..............................6-31 Environmental.................................................6-31 Setting a device name.................................6-31 Changing the network settings....................6-32 Field Network..................................................6-33 Security...........................................................6-34 Setting the password lock....................6-34 Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only)......................................6-35 FTP.................................................................6-36 Tilt Correction..................................................6-40 White Balance (for color type only).................6-42 Image display direction...................................6-43 Batch Backup..................................................6-44 Transfer Program Settings..............................6-44 Initialize Sensor...............................................6-44 Update Sensor................................................6-44 Sensor Information..........................................6-44 Operating from the menu bar.............................6-45 [File] menu......................................................6-45 Batch Backup..............................................6-45 Transfer Program Settings...........................6-45 Export..........................................................6-45 Program Settings List..........................6-45 Statistics/Histogram Data....................6-45 Exit...............................................................6-46 [View] menu....................................................6-46 Statistics......................................................6-46 Tool Data.....................................................6-46 [Sensor] menu.................................................6-47 Disconnect...................................................6-47 Reset Statistics............................................6-47 Initialize Sensor...........................................6-47 Sensor Update.............................................6-47 [Image] menu..................................................6-47 Zoom...........................................................6-47 Zoom Out.............................................6-47 Zoom In................................................6-47 Fit to Window.......................................6-47 Tool Display Options....................................6-47 Manual Trigger.............................................6-48 Capture........................................................6-48 Save Image..........................................6-48 Show saved image file location...........6-48 Change saved image file location........6-48 [Setting] menu.................................................6-48
11
Contents
Manual trigger button...................................6-48 Image while Running...................................6-48 Language.....................................................6-49 [Window] menu...............................................6-49 Program Details...........................................6-49 Sensors Internal Image History..................6-49 I/O Settings..................................................6-49 Advanced Sensor Settings..........................6-49 [Help] menu.....................................................6-50 User's Manual..............................................6-50 Version information......................................6-50 Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter....................................6-51 Installing the IVP-Converter............................6-51 Starting up the IVP-Converter.........................6-51 Main screen of the IVP Converter...................6-51 Converting IVP data to BMP data...................6-52
Chapter 7 Simulator
Simulator..............................................................7-2 Sensor Setup Simulation.......................7-2 IV Sensor Simulation.............................7-2 Confirming the image history.................7-2 Basic Operation of Simulator................................7-3 Operation flow of the Simulator.........................7-3 Saving the batch backup file.............................7-3 Starting the Simulator.......................................7-4 Simulator screen and operation flow.................7-4 Exiting the Simulator.........................................7-5 Transferring to the sensor.................................7-5 Names and Functions of the Screen....................7-6 Main screen of the Simulator............................7-6 Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation).....7-8 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow.....7-8 1. Image Optimization.......................................7-9 Main screen for the Image Optimization........7-9 2. Master Registration.....................................7-10 Main screen for the Master Registration......7-10 Registering the master image......................7-11 Master registration from the image history in the sensor............7-11 Master registration using the file saved in the PC...................................7-11 3. Tool Settings................................................7-12 Main screen for the Tool settings.................7-12 4. Output Assignment......................................7-13 Main screen for the Output Assignment......7-13 IV Sensor Simulation..........................................7-14 Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation........7-14 For Outline/Position Adjustment tool...........7-14 For Color Area/Area tool .............................7-16 Starting the IV Sensor Simulation...................7-17 Operating from the menu bar.............................7-18 [File] menu......................................................7-18 Open file......................................................7-18 Save............................................................7-18
Export..........................................................7-18 Save Program Settings List.................7-18 Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation..............................................7-18 Check Statistics/Histogram in operation......7-19 Terminate IV-Simulator................................7-19 Exit...............................................................7-19 [View] menu....................................................7-19 Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator.....................................7-19 [Image] menu..................................................7-20 Zoom...........................................................7-20 Reduce................................................7-20 Enlarge................................................7-20 Fit to Window.......................................7-20 Tool Display Options....................................7-20 Capture........................................................7-20 Save Image..........................................7-20 Show saved image file location...........7-20 Change saved image file location........7-20 [Setting] menu.................................................7-20 Language.....................................................7-20 [Window] menu...............................................7-21 Program Details...........................................7-21 Sensors Internal Image History..................7-21 I/O Settings..................................................7-21 Advanced Sensor Settings..........................7-21 [Help] menu.....................................................7-21 User's Manual..............................................7-21 Version information......................................7-21
Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......8-2 External trigger..................................................8-2 Internal trigger...................................................8-3 Operating in the shortest cycle......................8-3 Importing the Status Output.................................8-4 Importing the total status / total status NG output.......................................8-4 Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic.................................8-5 Changing the timing of the status output..........8-6 Cancelling One-Shot output..........................8-6 Changing Over.....................................................8-7 Registering the Master Image..............................8-8 Clearing Errors...................................................8-10 Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on...........................................................8-11 Input Response Time.........................................8-12 Response time for the switch program input.............................8-12 Response time for the external master registration input..........................................8-12 Response time for the error clear input.......8-12 Description for symbols...............................8-12
12
Contents
Chapter 9 Specifications
Specifications.......................................................9-2 Sensor...............................................................9-2 IV Software.......................................................9-4 Dimensions...........................................................9-5 Sensor...............................................................9-5 Optional parts for the sensor.............................9-6 Dome attachment..........................................9-6 Polarizing filter attachment............................9-7 Front cover....................................................9-7 Mounting adapter...........................................9-7 Power I/O cable.............................................9-7 Bracket..........................................................9-8 Communication cables......................................9-8 Ethernet cable...............................................9-8 NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable.................9-8
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor................................................... A-31 Confirming the router settings.................... A-32 Confirming the firewall settings................... A-32 Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable................................................. A-33 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-35 Settings after initialization.............................. A-35 Connecting method after initialization............ A-35 For direct connection.......................... A-35 For network connection...................... A-35 Initializing the network settings...................... A-35 Maintenance...................................................... A-36 Replacing the front cover............................... A-36 Index.................................................................. A-38
Appendices
Status Table......................................................... A-2 Status table...................................................... A-2 Displaying and outputting the status result...... A-4 Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment........................ A-4 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool................................................... A-5 Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-5 Cut-off process of the matching rate................ A-5 Settings List......................................................... A-6 Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen....... A-6 1 Image Optimization................................... A-6 2 Master Registration.................................. A-7 3 Tool Settings............................................. A-7 4 Output Assignment................................. A-10 Program Details screen................................. A-11 I/O Settings screen........................................ A-12 Advanced screen........................................... A-13 Troubleshooting................................................. A-16 Error Messages................................................. A-19 Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor.... A-19 Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator............................................. A-21 Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor.................................................. A-25 Remedy when direct connection is unavailable..................................................... A-25 Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable................................. A-26 Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor...................... A-29 LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......... A-29 STATUS indicator light................................ A-30 Other methods of confirming a network connection...................................................... A-31 Confirming the existence of the sensor from the PC............................... A-31 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC............................. A-31
13
Contents
MEMO
14
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains the system configurations and overview of IV Series, how to check package contents, and the name and function of each part.
1
Getting Started
System Configuration........................................1-2 Overview of IV Series.........................................1-4 Checking the Package Contents.......................1-8 Name and Function of Each Part....................1-11
1-1
System Configuration
System Configuration 1
Getting Started
Basic configurations of IV-Series

Connecting the PC and single sensor
IV Series IV Software (IV-Navigator) IV-H1
Ethernet cable (2m/5m/10m)
Sensor IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA
Power I/O cable (2m/5m/10m) (Optional) Dome attachment IV-D10 Polarizing filter attachment OP-87436/OP-87437 24 VDC power
Photoelectric/ proximity sensor etc. Sends the signal to the trigger input when the target is detected.
Indicator light/buzzer etc. Alarm can be output by the status output function.
PLC PLC can control the trigger input and the status output function, and can switch the program number.
1-2
System Configuration
Connecting the PC and multiple sensors

When the network is connected, the PC that the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software is installed can be connected by selecting a single sensor from among multiple sensors. * Each sensor requires the power I/O cable. * A single PC cannot be connected with multiple sensors at the same time. IV Software (IV-Navigator) IV-H1
1
Getting Started
Ethernet switch Ethernet cable (2m/5m/10m)
1-3
Overview of IV Series
Overview of IV Series 1
Getting Started
IV Series
The IV Series is an all-in-one Vision Sensor featuring a camera, a light, and a controller. This sensor can be attached easily so complicated detection operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a photoelectric switch can be achieved easily. Operation conditions settings require the IV Software, IV-Navigator (IV-H1) or the intelligent monitor (IVM30). After setting is completed, the sensor can be operated independently. The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so network connection with multiple sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

Direct connection zz Network connection zz
Functions of IV-Navigator yySetting the sensor yyMonitoring the operation screen yyMonitoring the statistical information yyReading the image history yySimulator Power I/O Ethernet switch Functions of sensor yyCamera yyLighting yyImage detection yyI/O yySaving the image history
1-4
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

IV-M30 is the dedicated monitor with a touch panel. For details of IV-M30, refer to "IV Series User's Manual (Monitor)".
1
Getting Started
Direct connection zz
Network connection zz
Power I/O
Functions of monitor yySetting the sensor yyMonitoring the operation screen yyMonitoring the statistical information yyReading the image history Functions of sensor yyCamera yyLighting yyImage detection yyI/O yySaving the image history
Ethernet switch
1-5
1
Getting Started
Judgment processing flow

This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device. Trigger input BUSY output Total status output
Trigger input
Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC. Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an internal trigger function.
Imaging
Light up the built-in light and image the target by using the CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.
Tool processing
According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality. Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned positions of the target can be corrected by using the position adjustment tool. After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output function turns OFF. Outputs the status results. When the total status result is OK, the total status output is ON. When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output is ON.
Status output
Save images
Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor. Conditions for saving the image can be selected from "NG only" or "All". Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type can save 300 images.
1-6
MEMO
1
Getting Started
1-7
Checking the Package Contents
Checking the Package Contents 1

Getting Started IV Series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are packed for each model you purchased before using.
Sensor
yyIV-500C yyIV-500CA yyIV-150M yyIV-150MA yyIV-500M yyIV-500MA yyIV-2000M yyIV-2000MA
Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1
Mounting adapter x 1 Screw for mounting adapter x 1 Sensor x 1 The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the default factory setting. Name and Function of Each Part (Page 1-11) Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2) Cables (Page 2-8)
Flathead screwdriver x 1 (Manual focus type only) Instruction Manual x 1
Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment
yyIV-D10 Mounting screw x 2 Instruction Manual x 1
Dome attachment 1 Using the dome attachment (Page 2-6)
Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1
Polarized visible light filter attachment

yyOP-87436 Mounting screw x 2 Instruction Manual x 1 Polarized visible light filter attachment x 1 Using the polarizing filter attachment (Page 2-7)
Infrared polarization filter attachment

yyOP-87437 Mounting screw x 2 Instruction Manual x 1 Infrared polarization filter attachment Using the polarizing filter attachment (Page 2-7)
1-8
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - stranded wire)

yyOP-87440 (2m) yyOP-87441 (5m) yyOP-87442 (10m)
Front cover (for replacement)

yyOP-87461 Mounting screw x 2
1
Getting Started
Front cover (for replacement) x 1
O-shaped ring (Small x 2, Large x 1)
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1
Mounting adapter
yyOP-87460 Screw for the mounting adapter x 1 Mounting adapter x 1 Same as accessories for the sensor. Optional parts in case of loss/damage.
Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1 Instruction Manual x 1 Optional parts for replacement. Replacing the front cover (Page A-36)
Bracket
yyOP-87685 Screw for the bracket and nut x 1 Mounting screw x 4
Bracket A x 1
Bracket B x 1
1-9
1
Getting Started
Communication cables
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)
NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1 NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1
IV Software
yyIV-H1 Instruction Manual x 1 Starting Guide x 1 CD-ROM 1 Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) (Page 2-14)
1-10
Name and Function of Each Part

Sensor
Name and function of each part of the sensor
1 2 3 4 1 Mounting adapter Use this for mounting and fixing the sensor. Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2) 2 Connector for power I/O cable Connector for connecting the power I/O cable. Use this for supplying the power to the sensor and for connecting with external devices. Cables (Page 2-8) 3 Focusing position adjustment screw (manual focus type only) Adjusts the focus of the displayed image. Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13) 4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable Connector for connecting a monitor cable or Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch. Cables (Page 2-8) When the cable is not connected, attach the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector to maintain enclosure rating. Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm 6 5 Indicator light Indicates the operating status of the sensor. Operation of the indicator light (Page 1-12) 6 Built-in light LED light that illuminates the target 7 Camera Images the object. 8 Front cover Protects the camera and built-in lights. The front cover is protected by the protection sheet (blue) in the default factory setting. Remove the sheet when the sensor is to be used. Front cover for replacement is provided for maintenance. Replacing the front cover (Page A-36)
1
Getting Started
7 8
1-11
1
Getting Started
Operation of the indicator light

Details on operations of the indicator light are shown below. 4 5
3 TRIG Green light lights up (one-shot) according to input of the internal or external trigger. 4 STATUS Indicates the connecting status to the PC. Normally connected with PC. yyGreen (ON)....... IP address has been retrieved yyGreen (Blink)..... but the sensor is not correctly connected with PC. IP address is not assigned. yy(OFF)................ Not correctly connecting with PC. Indicates the focusing status yyOrange (Blink)... while adjusting the focusing position with the blinking speed (manual focus type only). Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type (Page 4-14) Normal connection with the PC is not possible, refer to Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor (Page A-25). 5 LINK/ACT Indicates the linking status within PC or Ethernet switch. yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked. Normally linked, and the data yyGreen (Blink)..... is sending/receiving. Sensor is not normally linked. yy(OFF)................
1 2 3 1 PWR/ERR Indicates the power supplying status to the sensor and the error status of the sensor. yyGreen (ON).......Operating. Setting processing. Operation yyGreen (Blink)..... is stopped. Blinks once a second. Unrecoverable error has yyRed (ON)........... occurred. Recoverable error has yyRed (Blink)........ occurred. Power is not supplied. yy(OFF)................ Adjusting the focusing position (manual focus only). For countermeasures when an error occurred, refer to Error Messages (Page A-19). 2 OUT Indicates the comprehensive result. Comprehensive result is "OK". yyGreen................ Comprehensive result is "NG". yyRed................... Setting processing. yy(OFF)................ Standby status until the first judge finishes after starting the operation or after switching the program number. Indicates the focusing status yyOrange (Blink).... while adjusting the focusing position with the blinking speed (manual focus type only). Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type (Page 4-14)
1-12
2
Installation and Connection
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor, how to set up the PC, and how to connect the cables.
2
Mounting the Sensor..........................................2-2 Cables..................................................................2-8 Setting up the PC..............................................2-14
2-1
Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the Sensor

Checking the view and installed distance
For IV Series, installed distance between the view and target is different depending on the type of the sensor. Check the type of the sensor to be used and its view, and place it in the proper distance.
View H
2
yyGround (functional ground) the drain cable (FG) of the power I/O cable. yyMount and insulate the sensor. Use the attached mounting adapter to insulate. Sensor case has been grounded. If the sensor is not insulated, the electric potential and noises may cause a damage or malfunction. yyDo not place the sensor in the environment that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance to the environment, or environment that propagates the vibration directly to the sensor. Those may cause a damage or malfunction.
Indicator light
View V
yyManual focus type needs to adjust the focusing position after installed. Reserve the enough space to adjust and install it. yyAt the time of installation, it is better to enable the position or direction adjustment of the sensor by installing the adjustment system at the sensor mounting area. yyView and optical axis have individual differences. Adjust the position by checking the actual image at the time of installation. yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also, be careful when the light intensity of the ambient light changes. Use the shield to protect when the location cannot be changed. yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out the internal light or the view of the sensor. yyDetection may become unstable due to the lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each other. Delay the timing of external trigger or use the shield to avoid interference.
Installed distance WD View V = View H x 0.75 (H : V = 4 : 3)
The indicator light of the sensor side is the front surface of an image.
2-2
Mounting the Sensor
Standard range type (color/monochrome) zz

600
Installed distance WD (mm)
500 400 300 200 150 100 50 0 25 50 70 100 130 150 200 210 250
2
View H (mm)
Short range type zz

150
100
50
10 12
20
30
36
40
View H (mm)
Long range type zz

2500
2000 1500 1000 500 300 0 45 100 200 300 400
View H (mm)
The value of View H and V will be a half of the value on the figures above when using the digital zooming function (monochrome type only).
2-3
Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the sensor
2
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter
Mounting the mounting adapter

Use the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460) to mount the sensor. The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the default factory setting. Remove it from the sensor. Unmounting the sensor (Page 2-5)
1 Mount the sensor to the left and right

stopper on the mounting adapter.
Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the indicator light.
Indicator light
Mounting on the wall

yyScrew : M3 x 4 Use the commercially available screws which have head thickness of 3 mm or lower. yyTightening torque : 1.0 Nm or lower
Push the sensor to the stopper of the fixing screw
Mounting from the jig side

yyScrew : M4 x 4 Use the commercially available screws. yyTightening torque : 1.5 Nm or lower
Push until you hear the clicking sound from the both side stoppers
2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor using

the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 1 Use the attached screws. yyTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm
For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to Dimensions (Page 9-5).

Remove the protection sheet
2-4
Mounting the Sensor
Unmounting the sensor
1 Dismount the screw.
2
2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting

adapter and unmount the sensor.
Pull out the stopper
2-5
Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the attachment
2 Fix the dome attachment with attached

dedicated screws.
yyScrew : Dedicated screw x 2 Use the attached dedicated screws. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm
2
Using the dome attachment

Dome attachment can be used for the standard range type and short range type sensor. yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor. yyUse the dome attachment at a correct installation distance. Failure to do so may lose the effect of the dome attachment. yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment mounted. Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with the dome attachment mounted. White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-42)
Mounting the dome attachment
Installed distance of the dome attachment

62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor (0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome attachment) Sensor type yyStandard range type yyShort range type
Installed distance from the front face of the sensor
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the
concave part of the dome attachment with the mounting screw of the front cover of the sensor.
Front cover mounting screw
Screw hole for mounting the attachment Concave part
Concave part (0 to 50 mm)
62 to 112 mm
Target
2-6
Mounting the Sensor
Using the polarizing filter attachment

yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor. yyThere are the polarized visible light filter attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use the correct polarization filter attachment in accordance with the illuminant of the sensor light. Failure to do so may lose the effect. yyAdjust brightness with the polarization filter attachment mounted. Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with the polarization filter attachment mounted. White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-42)
2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with

the attached dedicated screws.
yyScrew : M2.5 x 2 Use the attached dedicated screws. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm
2
Remove the protection sheet (blue)
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the
concave part of the polarizing filter attachment with the mounting screw of the front cover of the sensor.
Front cover mounting screw
Screw hole for mounting the attachment Concave part
Concave part
2-7
Cables
Cables
Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor
3 Wire each cable according to its intended

purpose. Selecting NPN output zz
When NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9)
External device Brown (DC24V) Black/White/Gray/ Orange (OUT) Pink/Yellow/ Light Blue/Purple/ Green/Red (IN) Load IN DC24V OUT (NPN)
2
1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the
power I/O cable and pin connection of the cable connector, and connect the cable to the sensor.
Adjust the pins and the pin connection
Blue (0V) Drain wire (FG)
2 Tighten the connector by turning the screwon connector in the clockwise direction.
Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0 to 1.5 Nm.
yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use it by assigning the optional function to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.
Selecting PNP output zz

When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9)
Brown (DC24V) Pink/Yellow/ Light Blue/Purple/ Green/Red (IN) Black/White/Gray/ Orange (OUT) Blue (0V) External device
(PNP) OUT DC24V IN Load
When connecting the connector, insert it without tipping and tighten it well. If the tightening is weak, vibration can loosen the connector and cause bad connections. Also, the enclosure rating may not be maintained with loose connection. * Indication is retighten approximately 90 to 120 with tools such as pliers after tightening with hands.
Drain wire (FG)
yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use it by assigning the optional function to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.
2-8
Cables
Wiring color Brown Blue Black White Gray Orange Pink Yellow Light Blue Purple Green Red Drain
Name DC24V 0V OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 FG -
Assigning default value + side of power
Description
2
- side of power GND of input-output cable Output assignable function yyTotal Status yyTot. StatusNG yyRUN yyBUSY yyError yyPos. Adj. yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16) yyLogical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4) yyOFF (not used) Set external trigger. Rising timing () or falling timing () can be set. Input assignable function yyProgram bit0 to bit4 yyClear Error yyExt. Master Save yyOFF (not used) Insulated frame
Total Status (N.O.) BUSY (N.O.) Error (N.O.) OFF Ext. Trigger Rising OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -
Cable specification yyBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25 yyPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28 yyWith braided shield cable (with drain cable) yyThe output cable assignment can be changed. 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60) yyN.O./N.C. can be changed. Output Settings (Page 6-27) yyThe input cable assignment can be changed. Input Settings (Page 6-26)
yyIndividually insulate the non-used input-output cables. yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output). For contact output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the contact bouncing.
2-9
Cables
2
Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor

Input circuit
No-voltage input (When the NPN output is selected)
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes no-voltage input circuit. External power supply is not necessary. : 2 V or lower yyON voltage : 0.1 mA or lower yyOFF current : 2 mA (short circuit) yyON current
DC24V +3.3V
Output circuit
When the NPN output is selected
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes open collector NPN output circuit. yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
DC24V
Brown Load Overcurrent protection circuit Main circuit
OUT1 - OUT4
Brown
0V
Blue
IN1 - IN6
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6
Voltage input
(When the PNP output is selected)

Overcurrent protection circuit
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit. yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V : 15 V or higher yyON voltage : 2 mA (for 24V) yyON current : 0.2 mA or lower yyOFF current
DC24V
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6
2-10
Main circuit Main circuit
* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT4
0V
Blue
When the PNP output is selected

When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9), the circuit becomes open collector PNP output circuit. yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower
DC24V
Brown Main circuit
OUT1 - OUT4
* Load
Brown
0V
Blue * Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4) Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT4
IN1 - IN6
0V
Blue
Cables
Connecting the sensor and the PC

Connecting directly
Connects the sensor and PC using the Ethernet cable.
Connecting via network

Connects the Ethernet cable to the sensor. Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet switch. Connect the PC and Ethernet switch using the commercially available network cable.
2
Ethernet switch
For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer Connecting the Ethernet cable (Page 2-12). to
For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer to Connecting the Ethernet cable (Page 2-12).
The sensor does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet). Supply power using the power I/O cable.
2-11
Cables
Connecting the Ethernet cable
2
This section explains how to connect the Ethernet cable.
1 Align the pin connection parts of the
Ethernet cable connector with three pins of the cable connector, and connect the cable to the sensor.
Align the pins and the pin connection
Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces between connectors are shown below. yyEthernet cable (OP-87454/OP-87455/OP-87456) Tightening torque : 0.6 Nm Retightening degree : 15 to 30 Spaces between connectors : 1 mm (reference value) yyNFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459) Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 Nm Retightening degree : 5 to 10 Spaces between connectors : 0 mm (reference value) If the connector cable tightening is weak, vibration may loosen the connector and cause bad connections or cable disconnections. Also, the enclosure rating may not be maintained with loose connection. Properly follow the procedures above and tighten the connector completely. Check the spaces between the Ethernet cable connector and the cable connector.
2 Tighten the connector by turning the
screw-on connector in the clockwise direction. When connecting the connector, insert it without inclination while pushing in and tighten it well.
(2) When the screw stops rotating by the locking mechanism, further tighten it while pushing. (1) Tighten the screw-on connector
Spaces between connectors
2-12
Cables
MEMO
2
2-13
Setting up the PC
Setting up the PC
This section explains how to install/uninstall the IVNavigator (IV-H1) for IV Software and how to set up the PC.
Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

This section describes the procedure for installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software on the PC. yyThis section describes the installation using an installation example for Windows 7. yyExit or finish all other running software before the installation. yyLog on with a user who has administrative privileges. yyIf the user account control screen appears during the installation, click the [Continue] button. yyIf you have logged on with a user account that does not have administrative privileges, input a user account with administrative privileges and the password.
2
Required environment for the PC to be connected

To connect the sensor and PC, the environment which satisfies the following conditions is required. Confirm that the PC to be used satisfies the following conditions.
OS
One of the following OSs must be pre-installed. Home Premium/ yyWindows 7.............. Professional/Ultimate yyWindows XP...........Professional/HomeEdition Windows 7 supports for 32bit version/64bit version. Supported languages : Japanese/English
1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start

Windows.
Hardware
Interface Must be equipped with Ethernet (100 BASE-TX). Processor Needs to be compliant with yyWindows 7.............. system requirements for OS. Pentium III or better yyWindows XP........... Clock speed 1 GHz or faster Memory capacity Needs to be compliant with yyWindows 7.............. system requirements for OS. 512 MB or more yyWindows XP........... (1GB or more is recommended) Monitor yyResolution : 1024 768 pixel or higher yyDisplay color : High Color (16bit) or higher HDD free space required for installation 1 GB or more
2 Insert the IV-H1 disc into the media drive.

The installation program activates by the auto run function of the PC, and the InstallShield Wizard screen opens. If the installation program does not activate, open the media drive from the Computer and double-click "setup.exe".
3 Follow the instructions in the window.
Operating conditions
.NET Framework 2.0 Service Pack 2 or later must have been installed. * If this software has not been installed, it will be automatically installed at the time of IV-H1 installation.
4 After the completion window for 5 Remove the installation CD.
InstallShield Wizard is displayed, click the [Finish] button.
2-14
Setting up the PC
Installation destination of the software (reference)

Installation destination of the application software and the PDF User's Manual (default settings) are as follows.
Deleting the software (uninstall)

This section describes the procedure for uninstalling the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software. yyThis section explains the uninstallation using an uninstallation example for Windows 7. yyIf the user account control screen appears during the installation in the Windows 7 environment, click the [Continue] button. yyLog on with a user who has administrative privileges.
2
C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\IV-Navigator
Windows 7 64bit version : C:\Program Files (x86)\KEYENCE\IV-Navigator Application yyIV-Navigator.exe : IV-Navigator Manual IV Series User's Manual yyIV_Manual_xx.pdf :. (PC Software) Data saving destination yyWindows 7 Document for the logon user \IV-Navigator yyWindows XP My Document for the logon user \IV-Navigator
1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start

Windows.
2 Select [Control Panel] - [Programs and

Features] from the [Start] menu.
3 Select [IV-Navigator] and click [Uninstall].
4 After the confirmation dialog is displayed,

click the [Yes] button.
When the IV-Navigator is removed from the Programs and Features screen, uninstallation is completed.
2-15
Setting up the PC
2
Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)

yyLog on with a user who has administrative privileges. yyAuto acquisition of IP address (DHCP server) cannot be used due to the inability to connect with the sensor.
For Windows XP
1 Open the Control Panel. 2 Double-click [Network Connections]. 3 Right-click the [Local Area Connection]
icon and select [Properties] from the displayed menu. click the [Properties] button.
For Windows 7
1 Open the Control Panel. 2 Click ([Network and Internet]) - [Network

and Sharing Center].
4 Select [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and 5 Select [Use the following IP address] and
input the IP address and subnet mask.
3 Click [Change adapter settings] on the

upper left on the screen.
4 Right-click the [Local Area Connection]

icon and select [Properties] from the displayed menu.
5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/

IPv4)] and click the [Properties] button. input the IP address and Subnet mask.
6 Select [Use the following IP address] and
yyIP address yySubnet mask
: :
192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
For direct connection, set an arbitrary IP address (The above is an example). To connect with the existing network, input the IP address that was assigned by the network administrator. yyIP address yySubnet mask : : 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
6 After the setting is completed, click the

[OK] button and close all the windows.
For direct connection, set an arbitrary IP address (The above is an example). To connect with the existing network, input the IP address that was assigned by the network administrator.

[OK] button and close all the windows.
2-16
3
Basic Operation
This chapter explains the overview of the IV-Navigator screen and operation of IV Series, basic operation flow, and the operation when turning on the power for the first time. Also, explains how to reset the sensor to the default factory setting.
3
Basic Operation
Overview of Screen and Operation...................3-2 Basic Operation Flow.........................................3-4 Operation when the Power is Turned on..........3-5 Resetting to the Factory Default Settings......3-10 Basic Operation for Tools................................3-11
3-1
Overview of Screen and Operation

Indicates each screen of the IV-Navigator and overview of the operation. For details of what can be set on each screen and its operations, see to the applicable references. Activation Menu screen Program Details
Checks or initializes the program. Things can be performed with the program functions (Page 6-6)
3
Basic Operation
Select the connection method with the sensor or the IVsimulator. You can also change the display language. Operation when the Power is Turned on (Page 3-5)
Main screen in [Run]

Images and judges based on the judgment condition. Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program] (Page 5-3)
Main screen in [Program]

Performs the program settings, sensor settings, and reference of the image history. Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program] (Page 5-3)
Simulator
The batch backup file (*.iva) is used to confirm or change the setting contents and confirm the image history. Chapter 7 Simulator (Page 7-1)
3-2
Sensors internal image history

Operates the image history in the sensor. Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15)
I/O Settings
Advanced Sensor Settings
Sets the input/output-related Performs the advanced settings for settings for the sensor. the sensor. Setting the Input and Output Setting the Advanced Information Information of the Sensor (Page 6-26) of the Sensor (Page 6-30)
3
Basic Operation
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup)

Sets the program to be used for judgment. Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
Tool Auto Tuning

Automatically adjusts threshold of tool and extraction conditions of Color Area/Area tool in accordance with OK/NG image. Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)
3-3
Basic Operation Flow
Basic Operation Flow

Installing, connecting, and wiring the sensor
Mount the sensor, and then connect and wire the cable. Also, installing the IV-Navigator. Chapter 2 Installation and Connection (Page 2-1)
3
Basic Operation
3-4
Turning on the power

Turn on the power of the sensor, and then perform the initial start-up setting. Operation when the Power is Turned on (Page 3-5)
Settings Navigator
Create the program to be used for operation in the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup).
STEP 1: Setting of image optimization

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus. 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)
STEP 2: Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the reference for judgment. 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
STEP 3: Tool setting

Set the tool to judge a target. Place a tool on the master image and set the thresholds for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set. 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)
STEP 4: Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4). 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
Starting the operation/adjustment

Switch the [Program] screen to the [Run] screen, and start the operation. If the setting is inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning). Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)
Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation flow when the power is turned on
Turn on the power of the sensor
IV-Navigator startup (1) Direct Connection/Network Connection (2) Initial startup of the sensor (3) Connection failed (Error message)
(1) There are two connection methods for connecting the sensor: Direct Connection and Network Connection. Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection) (Page 3-6) Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection) (Page 3-6) (2) When the power of the sensor is turned on for the first time, set the Polarity. Operation for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-9) (2) The main screen in [Program] opens. Set the activation condition in the Settings Navigator. After the setting is completed, operation begins. Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1) (4) After the second time of starting the sensor, the operation begins when the power is turned on. Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)
3
Basic Operation
(4)
(5)
Sensor Setup
Run
(5) If the connection has failed, refer to Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor (Page A-25).
The sensor can be independently operated.
3-5
Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)
3
Basic Operation
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

Turn on the power of the sensor before the [Direct Connection] button is clicked in step 3.
yyWhen the sensor is connected with the PC for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. Refer Operation for initial startup of the sensor to (Page 3-9). yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, the main screen in [Run] or [Program] opens. yyIf the PC cannot connect with the sensor, Remedy when direct connection is refer to unavailable (Page A-25). yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is automatically set. yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor when the PROFINET function is being used, the PROFINET function will stop. To use the PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.
2 Double-click the [IV-Navigator] icon on the

desktop.
The Activation Menu screen opens.
3 Click the [Direct Connection] button.
Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)

Starting the IV-Navigator
yyIf the [Language] is clicked, the Select language screen opens. Select the arbitrary language so that the language to be displayed can be switched. yyTo use the FTP client function or field network, select the [Network Connection] button.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

Turn on the power of the sensor before the [Network Connection] button is clicked in step 3.
2 Double-click the [IV-Navigator] icon on the

desktop.
4 Click the [Connect] button.

3 Click the [Network Connection] button.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the PC, select the network adapter. If the [Language] is clicked, the Select language screen opens. Select the arbitrary language so that the displayed language can be switched.
3-6
The Network Connection screen opens.
Searching for a sensor to be connected

Automatically searches for a sensor on the network and connects with it. yyThe search time is about 10 seconds. yySearching range and retrievable number of units are as follows. yySensor with no IP address (default) : A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor reaches (Page A-35). yySensor with IP address : A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on the local network to which the monitor is connected.
3
Basic Operation
There are two ways to set the sensor to be connected. For details of procedures, refer to each reference.
When the sensor on the network is zz searched

Searching for a sensor to be connected (Page 3-7)
When the sensor is specified by the IP zz address

Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address (Page 3-8)
1 Turn on the power of the sensor. 2 Click the [Search Sensor] button.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the PC, select the network adapter. Searching the sensor begins.
When the searching is finished, the searched result will be displayed. If the search results are not displayed, refer to When the connection cannot be established by searching the sensor (Page A-27).
3-7
When connecting to the sensor with no IP zz address

Click the [Connect] button.
3 Select the sensor to be connected.
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address

Used when the IP address of the sensor to be connected is defined beforehand.
3
Basic Operation
1 Input the IP address of the sensor to be

connected.
The Network Settings screen opens. Input the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and PORT, and then click the [Connect] button.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the PC, select the network adapter.
2 Click the [Connect] button.

When connecting to the sensor with set IP zz address
Click the [Connect] button.
yyWhen the sensor is connected with the PC for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. Refer Operation for initial startup of the sensor to (Page 3-9). yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, the main screen in [Run] or [Program] opens.
yyWhen the sensor is connected with the PC for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. Refer Operation for initial startup of the sensor to (Page 3-9). yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, the main screen in [Run] or [Program] opens. If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor, refer to When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor (Page A-28).
3-8
Operation for initial startup of the sensor

When the monitor is connected to the sensor in the default setting, the screen to select the polarity (NPN or PNP) opens. After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in Settings Navigator. For details of the Polarity, refer to Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor (Page 2-10) .
3
Basic Operation
1 Select the polarity of the sensor and click

the [OK] button.
The main screen in [Program] opens.
2 Click the [Sensor Setup] button and set

up the program.
For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1).
3-9
Resetting to the Factory Default Settings

Initializing the sensor
Initializes information set in the sensor and uses factory default setting.
3 Click the [OK] button.
3
Basic Operation
yyThe following settings will not be initialized. yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28) yyNetwork settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask / Default Gateway / PORT (TCP)) (Page 6-32) yyTo initialize the registered programs individually, Initializing a program (Page 6-14). refer to
The confirmation dialog appears.
4 Click the [Yes] button.
1 Switch the IV-Navigator to the main screen

in [Program] and click the [Advanced] button.
Initialization begins. After initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen opens.
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
Select the [Initialize/Update] tab and click the [Initialize Sensor] button.
The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.
3-10
Basic Operation for Tools
Basic Operation for Tools

Operating the image tool bar
This section explains the operation method for image tool bar displayed at the upper part of the image display screen for the IV-Navigator by using an example of the main screen in [Run]. (4) Tool Display Options Switches the display method for the detection tool to be displayed on the image display screen. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) (5) [Manual Trigger] / [Trigger ON] button Displayed if the external trigger is being set. Use this button when the external trigger cannot be output. This button is not displayed on the simulator screen. yy[Manual Trigger] button Displayed during the [Run] mode. Outputs the trigger once in each click of the button. yy[Trigger ON] button Displayed during the [Program] mode. Switches the continuous trigger to ON/OFF in each click of the button. (6) [Save Image] button Individually saves the image displayed on the IVNavigator into the PC. The ivp format file which can be used for master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning will also be saved at the same time. The IV-Navigators screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot). Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually (Page 6-22) (7) [Show saved image file location] button Opens the folder which saves an image when the [Save Image] button is clicked. By clicking the button and selecting the [Change saved image file location], the saving destination of an image can be changed.
3
Basic Operation
Image display screen
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) [Zoom In] / [Zoom Out] button In each time of clicking the button, magnifies/reduces the displayed image on the image display screen. Displayable zooming rates are as follows. 100% / 125% / 150% / 200% / 300% / 500% If an entire image cannot be displayed, the zooming rate currently displayed will be displayed at the lower right of the screen.
Entire image
Enlarged area currently displayed
(2) [Fit to Window] button Makes the display size of the displayed image fit with the window size. (3) Display Magnification Displays the display magnification of the displayed image on the image display screen.
3-11
Editing the tool window

The tool window displayed when the tool is set in the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or direction. This section explains how to edit the tool window using an example of [Outline] tool.
Changing the size of the tool window zz

By moving the mouse cursor onto either side of the tool window, the mouse cursor changes to or . The height or width of the tool window can be changed by dragging it.
3
Basic Operation
1 In the tool settings of the Settings
Navigator, click the [Add Tool] button and click the [Outline] button.
The tool window of an outline tool will be displayed. By moving the mouse cursor onto either corner of the tool window except the upper right corner, the mouse cursor changes to . The size of the tool window can be changed by dragging it.
Window Shape
Tool window
Selecting the shape of the tool window zz

On the screen to set the outline tool, the screen to select the shape of the tool window opens by clicking the [Window Shape] button. The [Rect] or [Circle] can be selected.
Rect Circle
2 Set the tool window of an outline tool.
When [Circle] is selected in the window shape settings, the size of the circle can be changed by dragging the outline of the circle.
Changing the direction of the tool window zz Moving the tool window zz
By moving the mouse cursor onto the tool window, the mouse cursor changes to to move the tool window. . Drag the cursor By dragging the arrow mark on the upper right of the tool window, the direction of the tool window can be changed. Also, the direction can be reset by the [Angle Reset] button.
3-12
4
(Setting the Judgment Condition)
Settings Navigator
This chapter explains the functions and operations of the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup).
Settings Navigator..............................................4-2 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator......4-3 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target).....................................4-6 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)....4-20 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)...4-28 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)..............................4-60
4
4-1
Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup), the setting items of the program required for judging the target with the sensor are set in each step. Set the menus by sequentially proceeding the steps using the navigation button.
Menus
4
Navigation button
Flow in the Settings Navigator

STEP 1 Image Optimization settings
Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus. 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)
STEP 2 Master Registration

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the reference of judgment. 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
STEP 3 Tool Settings

Set the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set. 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)
STEP 4 Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4). 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Starting the Settings Navigator
5 Click the [Sensor Setup] button.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor. 2 Start the IV-Navigator.
Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection) (Page 3-6) Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection) (Page 3-6)
The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.
4
When the sensor is in the following condition, the main screen in [Program] opens. Proceed to step 5. yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time yyIf all programs are not being set yyIf the sensor is being setting up
When the program which has not been set zz in step 5 is selected
Start setting [1. Image Optimization].
1. Image Optimization settings
6 Perform the following operation.
3 Click the [Program] button.
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6) The confirmation dialog appears.
When the program which has been set in zz step 5 is selected

Click the shortcut button for each step to start setting.
Shortcut button
IV-Navigator switches to [Program]. 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6) 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20) 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28) 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
4-3
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow. For details of the contents which can set on each setting screen and its operations, refer to the applicable references. 1. Image Optimization
4
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)
2. Master Registration
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)
4. Output Assignment
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
4-4
Finishing the Settings Navigator

This section explains the procedure to finish the Settings Navigator.
Finishing without completing the steps
1 Click the [Exit Setup] button at the lower

right of the screen.
Finishing by completing all steps
1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator. 2 Click the [Complete] button at the lower
4
right of the [Output Assignment] screen. When the required settings are completed zz
The confirmation dialog to save appears.
When the required settings are not zz completed

The confirmation dialog to finish appears. yyBy clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation dialog to save appears. yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen. Required settings are not completed yet. Even if the [OK] button is clicked, the proper operation cannot be performed.
When the program setting has been changed, the confirmation dialog to save appears.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into the program, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program]. yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation dialog to cancel the settings appears. By clicking the [OK] button, the screen closes without saving the settings. yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into the program, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program]. yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation dialog to cancel the settings appears. By clicking the [OK] button, the screen closes without saving the settings. yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
4-5
1. Image Optimization
3. Tool Settings
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Setting the Image Optimization
In this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining differences in high and low-quality-targets.
Trigger Options zz
A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can image a target at any timing and can image continuously. Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8) Checking the view and installed distance (Page 2-2)
4
Brightness Adjustment zz
The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using the CMOS image sensor. In the Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material). Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)
Focus Adjustment zz
Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Auto focus can adjust the focusing position automatically. Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13)
4-6
1. Image Optimization Trigger Options
2. Master Registration Brightness Adjustment
3. Tool Settings Focus Adjustment
4. Output Assignment Extended Functions
Main screen for the Image Optimization

Explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (6)
4
(7)
(5)
(8)
(9)
(1) Title Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) [Image type] display Displays the image type. Displays an image taken by yyLive................... the currently imaging sensor. (4) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the image taken by the sensor. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (5) Image by the sensor Displays an image taken by the sensor.
(6) Settings button Displays the settings to be set in the Image Optimization. Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8) Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3) Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13) Extended Functions for the Image Optimization (Page 4-16) (7) Edit settings screen Displays the settings to be edited of the selected item using the settings button in the tab format. (8) [Next to STEP2] button Proceeds to "2. Master Registration". 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20) (9) [Exit Setup] button Exits the Settings Navigator. Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
4-7
3. Tool Settings
Brightness Adjustment
Focus Adjustment
Extended Functions
Setting the Trigger Options

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.
Settings for the Trigger Options
4
Items
Description
Setting range yyInternal Trigger Starts imaging continuously within the time interval specified in the trigger interval setting.
Default value
Trigger Options (Trigger type)
Select the type of the timing to start imaging.
yyExternal Trigger Internal Starts imaging with the external Trigger trigger synchronized with the target's motion from a photoelectric sensor or PLC installed outside. The time (trigger delay) between inputting the trigger until imaging starts can be set.
Trigger Interval
Set when [Internal Trigger] is selected in the trigger type setting. Set an interval (cycle) to automatically start imaging. Set when the [External Trigger] is selected in the trigger type setting.
1 to 10,000 ms
50 ms
Trigger Delay
Used when the output timing of the sensor for the trigger occurrence and the imaging timing of this device. This device starts imaging after the time set in the trigger delay of the trigger input passes.
0 to 1,000 ms
0 ms
4-8
Internal trigger zz
Trigger interval Trigger interval (1) Internal trigger Imaging/ internal processing Status output (2) (3)
4
(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings. (2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging. (3) Outputs the status result.
External trigger zz
Trigger delay (1) External trigger Imaging/ internal processing Status output (2) (3)
(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing. When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period. (2) Performs the internal processing after imaging. (3) Outputs the status result.
4-9
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended Functions
Setting the Trigger Options
Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)
When the [Internal Trigger] is selected in zz step 4

Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to 10,000 ms.
5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.
2 Display the main screen for the Image
4
Optimization.
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow (Page 4-4)
3 Click the [Trigger Options] button.
The screen to edit the Trigger Options settings opens.
Select the trigger type.

Select [Internal Trigger] or [External Trigger].
If the internal trigger time is shorter than the processing time (Page 5-37), a trigger error occurs. Internal trigger (Page 8-3) Error Messages (Page A-19)
When the [External Trigger] is selected in zz step 4

Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to 1000 ms.
4-10
In the automatic brightness adjustment, the target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure time, and an imaging mode according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material).
Brightness Adjustment settings

Items [Automatic Brightness Adjustment] button Description Automatically adjusts the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, material). Setting range Default value
4
yyNormal This mode is the basic imaging mode. The target can be imaged with less noise. Select an imaging mode of the sensor. yyHDR Select to image a target such as a metal which reflects a light and has a high contrast. yyHigh Gain Select it to shorten the exposure time and when the imaging environment is in a dark place. Lowers the imaging quality due to high gain. Exposure Time Displays a current exposure time. Standard range type (color) Brightness Sets brightness of an image manually. Standard range type (monochrome) Short range type Long rang type [Undo] button Resets the image taken by the sensor to the state before brightness was adjusted. 1 to 100 1 to 120 1 to 120 1 to 100 20 -
Imaging Mode
Normal
4-11
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended Functions
Adjusting brightness
4 Adjust brightness.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Optimization.
4
3 Click the [Brightness Adjustment] button.
The screen to edit the Brightness Adjustment settings opens.
When brightness is to be adjusted zz automatically

Click the [Automatic Brightness Adjustment] button. When a brightness adjustment is completed, the adjusted image will be displayed for the image taken by the sensor.
When brightness is to be adjusted zz manually

Adjust brightness by selecting the imaging mode and sliding the slider. Depends on the combination of an imaging mode and a slider position, the image taken by the sensor switches to the adjusted image. The position of the slider can be moved by inputting the values or clicking the []/[] button. yyThe result of the brightness adjustment will be displayed in the exposure time. yyDuring the automatic brightness adjustment, the sensor automatically images a target by inputting the internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options settings. yyDo not move a target during the automatic brightness adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted correctly.
4-12
Focus Adjustment
Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Adjusting the methods differ depending on the type of the sensor connected (manual focusing type/ auto focusing type).
Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type

Optimization.

Auto focusing type zz

Adjusts the focusing position manually or automatically. yyFor manual adjustment Adjust the focus by the slider. yyFor automatic adjustment The sensor automatically detects the position that can be focused by clicking the [Automatic Focus Adjustment] button. The focusing position can be adjusted by operating the slider after automatically adjusted. When the sensor detects multiple matching positions for the focusing position, the optional positions are marked on the slider. Select the focus position from the detected optional positions.
4
3 Click the [Focus Adjustment] button.
The screen to edit the Focus Adjustment settings opens. If the auto focus adjustment position (Page 6-35) is set to [Common], the screen to recommend the re-registration of the master image for other programs opens.
Manual focusing type zz

Turn the focus adjustment screw using the attached flathead screwdriver to adjust the focusing position. yyPlace a target at the appropriate position. Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2) yyDo not move a target during the focus adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted correctly.
When the focusing position is to be zz adjusted automatically

Click the [Automatic Focus Adjustment] button.
4 Adjust the focusing position.
When the focus adjustment is completed, the adjusted image will be displayed for the image taken by the sensor.
4-13
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended Functions
When the focusing position is to be zz adjusted manually

Adjust the focusing position by the slider. yyDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor automatically images a target by inputting the internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous lighting (Page 4-19) is set, the sensor images with the flash lighting. yyThe auto adjustment searches the positions that can be focused over the entire area regardless of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).
4
Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type

When multiple focusing positions exist zz
When there are multiple positions that can be focused, the following screen opens.

Optimization.
3 Click the [Focus Adjustment] button.

By clicking the [OK] button, the focus is adjusted to the closest position to the sensor, and the options of the positions that can be focused are indicated by ( ). To change the focusing position to an optional position, click the options ( ) of the focusing positions.
4 Image the target.
If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, click the button (Page 3-11) to image the
target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. When the button is clicked again, the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.
4-14
5 Turn the focus adjustment screw of
the sensor with the attached flathead screwdriver, and adjust the focus until the focus value reaches the peak mark.
When the focus cannot be adjusted by watching the focus indicator on the PC, you can check with the blinking cycle of the STATUS and OUT of the indicator light. yyQuickly blinks....Focused. Not focused. Adjusts to the yySlowly blinks..... most blinking position.
STATUS indicator light
4
OUT indicator light
The focus indicator indicates the positions that can be focused over the entire area regardless of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).
Bar gauge
Peak mark
The peak mark is displayed on the position where the focus is at the maximum. Turn the focus adjustment screw to make the bar gauge on the peak mark position. By clicking the [Peak Clear] button, the peak mark will be hidden, and the current focusing value will be updated as a maximum value.
4-15
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended Functions
Extended Functions for the Image Optimization

Adjusts the Image Optimization in the extended functions.
Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization

Items Description Setting range yyEntire Sets the field of view of the imaging area for the sensor to the entire area. Entire yyPartial Edit a tool window and set an arbitrary area in the sensor's field of view as a imaging area. Default value
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) Imaging Area
Sets the imaging area (image size of the sensor). When the imaging area is reduced, the shutter speed and judging process become faster.
Imaging Area Digital Zoom
Switches digital zoom ON/OFF. Images by magnifying the center field two times. The field of view OFF/ON of horizontal and vertical sides will be a half size. (Monochrome type only) Resets the sensor condition to the condition before the settings were changed. Applies the color filters if the outline of a certain color cannot be displayed when the image is displayed in monochrome by color type sensor. (Color type only) Select ON/OFF for the built-in light. -
OFF
[Undo] button
Color Filters
Unused / Red / Green / Blue / Cyan / Magenta / Yellow
Unused
Lighting
yyON Turns ON built-in light. yyOFF Turns OFF built-in light. yyFlash The built-in light lights within an exposure time at the time of imaging. yyContinuous The built-in light lights continuously regardless of a specified exposure time when imaging a target.
ON
Lighting Lighting Mode Select a lighting mode for the built-in light.
Flash
4-16
Imaging Area

Optimization.

3 Click the [Extended Functions] button.
yyIf the tool has been set, a rectangular area containing tool windows of all tools which have been set will be displayed as [Active Range]. The imaging area cannot be set smaller than the active range. To narrow down the imaging area, change the placement of the tool windows before adjusting the imaging area. yySet a range including the center of the field of the view when trapezoidal correction (Page 6-40) is to be performed. A region that cannot be exposed is created in the exposure range. yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12). yyWhen an imaging area is specified, outside of specified area will be displayed in black.
4
The screen to edit the extended functions settings opens.
4 Select the [Imaging Area] tab and select a

type of the imaging area.
If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.
Imaging area
4-17
3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment
Extended Functions
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)
Color filters (color type only)

This is disabled for the Color Area tool.

Optimization.

Optimization.
4
2 Display the main screen for the Image 3 Click the [Extended Functions] button.
4 Select the [Imaging Area] tab and set the

digital zoom to OFF/ON.
4 Select the [Color Filters] tab.
The screen to edit the extended functions settings opens. The image changes to monochrome. In this example, the outline in red and blue will be undefined.
5 Select the color to apply the color filter.
Select the filter of the color or complementary color to be detected (select red here). By applying the color filter of the selected color, the red color becomes brighter and the outline among the blue color will be clarified.
Clarified outline
4-18
Lighting

Optimization.

4
4 Select the [Lighting] tab and set the

Lighting and Lighting Mode.
yyWhen the lighting mode has been changed, re-register the master image and re-set the tool. Otherwise correct judgment may not be possible. yyWhen [Continuous] has been selected, the light goes off for approximately 0.3 ms right before imaging.
4-19
3. Tool Settings
2. Master Registration ( Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)

Registers a master image to be a reference for judgment.
Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the Master Registration.
(1)
4
(2) (3) (4) (6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Title Displays a program number (Page 6-11) and a program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) [Image type] display Displays an image type. Displays a master image (still yyMaster............... image). Displays an image taken by yyLive................... the currently imaging sensor. Indicates that the IV-Navigator yyTest................... is in the Test mode. (4) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the image taken by the sensor. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (5) Image by the sensor Displays an image taken by the sensor. The image type to be displayed will be different depending on the settings screen.
(6) Edit settings screen Displays the settings for the Master Registration in the tab format. Registering the Live image as a master image (Page 4-21) Master registration from the image history in the sensor (Page 4-22) Master registration using the file saved in the PC (Page 4-23) Extended Functions for the Master Registration (Page 4-25) (7) [Back] button Returns to the settings screen for the Image Optimization. 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6) (8) [Next to STEP3] button Proceeds to "3. Tool settings". 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28) (9) [Exit Setup] button Exits the Settings Navigator. Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
4-20
1. Image Optimization Register Live image as master
3. Tool Settings
4. Output Assignment Extended functions
Register image of the image history
Register image of the file
Registering the master image

Registering the Live image as a master image
Registers an image taken by the sensor as a master image.
6 Click the [Register the image] button.

Registration.
4
2 Display the main screen for the Master

3 Place a target of the high-quality-target
The The master image has been registered. message appears.
to be the reference for judgment on the imaging position. button.
4 Click the [Register Live image as master]
The system returns to the main screen for the Master Registration.
Settings for erasing outline (Page 4-38, Page 4-58) will be initialized. Set the settings again as needed.
5 Images the target.
4-21
3. Tool Settings
4. Output Assignment Register image of the file Extended functions
Register Live image as master
Master registration from the image history in the sensor

Registers an image of the image history in the memory of the sensor as a master image. To perform a master image registration from the image history in sensor, the image to be registered as a master image in the image history must be saved. Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15)
4 Select the image to be registered as a
mater image and click the [OK] button.

Select the image
4

Registration.
For details of how to operate the screen, refer to Loading and confirming the saved images (Page 6-17). The confirmation dialog for master image registration appears.

5 Check the displayed image and click the

[Registration] button.
If the imaging area of the loaded image is different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an area that has not been imaged is registered, the area will be displayed in black.
3 Click the [Register image from image

history] button.
The Sensors internal image history screen opens.
The new master image is registered, and the system returns to the main screen for the Master Registration.
4-22
3. Tool Settings
Master registration using the file saved in the PC

Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp) stored in the PC, and register as a master image. yySave the image to be registered as a master image into any PC in advance. yyThe files which can be registered as a master image are batch backup files (*.iva) and the image capture files (*.ivp). Folder composition and file naming rules (Page 6-25)
4 Select [IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp)] or

[IV Series Batch Backup File (*.iva)] in the File of type.
4
IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp) or IV Series Batch Backup File (*.iva)
When using batch backup files (*.iva)
5 Select a file to be registered as a master

image and click the [Open] button.

Registration.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow (Page 4-4) The Image type selection screen opens.
3 Click the [Register image from file

location] button.
6 Select an image type and click the [OK]

button.
Select from the image history or master image saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).
The image list for the selected image type opens.
7 Select an image to be registered as a mater

The screen to select the file opens.
image and click the [OK] button.
Select the image
The confirmation dialog for master image registration appears.
4-23
3. Tool Settings

When using image capture files (*.ivp)

Registration.

4
3 Click the [Register image from file location]

button.
The new master image is registered, and the system returns to the main screen for the Master Registration. The [Open] screen opens.
4 Select [IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp)] or
[IV Series Image Capture File (*.ivp)] in the File of type.
IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp) or IV Series Image Capture File (*.ivp)
5 Select a file to be registered as a master

image and click the [Open] button.
The confirmation dialog for master image registration appears.

4-24
3. Tool Settings

Extended Functions for the Master Registration

Items of extended functions for the Master Registration
Brightness Correction zz
By setting a reference of brightness to the master image, effect of variation of brightness can be reduced. yyBrightness correction can be set when the master image is registered. yyFor the Color Area tool of the color type, brightness correction will be disabled.
4
Brightness Correction
The new master image is registered, and the system returns to the main screen for the Master Registration.

Registration.

3 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and

click the [Settings] button. For color type zz
4-25
3. Tool Settings
For monochrome type zz
5 Click the [Test] button.
* Screen for the color type
4
4 Set the tool window to be a reference of
brightness correction and click the [OK] button.

Region to be the brightness correction reference
6 Click the [Before Corr.]/[After Corr.]
If brightness in the specified region is changed using the masking shield, check that brightness of the entire image is corrected.
and check the operation status before brightness correction and status after brightness correction.
For the region to be a reference of brightness correction, specify the following. yyA region with average medium brightness. A region with strong shininess and reflection and a region with no shininess and reflection may not be corrected properly. yyA region with a constant imaging status which does not change such as device parts other than the targets. For details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) .
The system returns to the settings screen for brightness correction.
yyWhen brightness correction is not to be used, click the [Delete] button on the screen in step 3. yyBrightness correction corrects brightness of the entire image to make the average brightness in the tool window to be a reference of brightness correction the same as brightness of a master image.
4-26
4
MEMO
4-27
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)

In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the master image. The aspects of a target registered as a master image are set as a high-quality-target. During an operation, the sensor judges whether it is a highquality-target or low-quality-target by judging the differences in the registered high-quality-target and a target to be examined. Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to 1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools can judge a target at the same time.
Types of tools
Outline tool zz
A detection tool to calculate the matching rate for the target to be examined based on the outline information of a registered high-qualitytarget. Judges whether a target is a high or low-qualitytarget by setting threshold to the matching rate. Outline tool (Page 4-34) Tool settings
Master image Outline extraction processing
4
Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose

Select a tool according to the purpose of an examination. Detection tool to be used Purposes To detect the surface/ rear face of parts To detect the orientation of parts To detect mixture of parts with different shapes To detect assembly deficiencies of parts To detect processing defects of parts To detect differences in sizes (areas) To detect mixture of different colors Outline tool Color Area/ Area tool Searches a target which has the outline of same shapes as an outline of a high-quality-target. Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.
Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK>
Example when the result was NG

No same shapes exist (Detection of existence) Different shape (Shape detection)

Different direction (Detection of direction)
The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100. 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched. The matching rate decreases in accordance with the number of non-matched parts.
4-28
3. Tool Settings
Color Area/Area tool zz

A tool to calculate the matching rate in the area (number of pixels) of a target to be examined as the basis (100 %) of the area (number of pixels) of a registered high-quality-target. This judges whether a target is a high or low-quality-product by setting the threshold to the matching rate. If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color Area tool. The system judges by the area with an arbitrary specified color. If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will be the Area tool. The system judges by the area with an arbitrary specified brightness. Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42) Tool settings
Color extraction process (Color type) Master image Brightness extraction process (Monochrome type)
Position Adjustment tool zz

A tool to correct the differences in position (position gap) of a target to be examined. The position adjustment is used with other detection tools. Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-53) Tool settings
Master image
4
Tool window Position adjustment window
Processing during an operation Position adjustment process
Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK> Tool window Position adjustment window Search region of the tool window
Compares the area of a target as defining an area of high-quality-target to 100 %.
Example when the judgment was NG

Area is narrow Area is wide
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100 (default). 100 indicates that an area is completely matched. The matching rate decreases as the area of a target narrows. yyThe setting range of the display range and threshold for matching rate can be changed to 0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged by setting the threshold to the upper limit. Setting the upper limit (Page 4-48)
4-29
3. Tool Settings
Main screen for the Tool settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (7)
4
(5)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1) Title Displays a program number (Page 6-11) and a program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) [Image Type] display Displays an image type. Displays a master image (still yyMaster............... image). Displays an image taken by yyLive................... the currently imaging sensor. Indicates that the IV-Navigator yyTest................... is in the Test mode. (4) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the image taken by the sensor. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (5) Master image Displays a master image and a tool window. If a search region is set, the tool window which indicates the search region (light blue) will be displayed. By clicking the tool window, the selected tool can be switched.
(6) Tool settings button Adds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool. Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool (Page 4-31) (7) Tool list Displays a list of tools set in the program and a threshold of each tool. (8) [Back] button The system returns to the Master Registration screen. 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20) (9) [Next to STEP4] button Proceeds to output assignment. 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60) (10) [Exit Setup] button Exits the Settings Navigator. Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
4-30
3. Tool Settings
Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool
Adding a tool
Newly sets a tool.
1 Click the [Add Tool] button.
4 Set setting items for each tool.
Outline tool (Page 4-34) Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42) Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-53)
4
Editing a tool
yyIf no tools are set, only the [Add Tool] button can be clicked. yyIf one or more tools are added in one program, the [Edit], [Copy], or [Delete] buttons can be clicked. Edits the settings of a tool which has already been set.
1 Select a tool to edit the settings.
2 Select the tool to be added and click the

[OK] button.
2 Click the [Edit] button.
The message dialog to add tools appears. The [ColorArea] tool for the color type and the [Area] tool for the monochrome type will be displayed.
Tools can also be edited by double-clicking the tool in the tool list.
3 Edit setting items for each tool.
Outline tool (Page 4-34) Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42) Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-53)
4-31
3. Tool Settings
Copying a tool
Copies a tool which has been set and pastes it to a same position. This is for the Outline tool and Color Area/Area tool. This section explains using example of the Outline tool.
4 Click the [Edit] button and set the copied

tool.
Outline tool (Page 4-34) Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42)
4
1 Select a tool to be copied.

Select the copy source tool.
Deleting a tool
Deletes an unnecessary tool.
1 Select a tool to be deleted.
2 Click the [Copy] button. 2 Click the [Delete] button.
The confirmation dialog appears. If 16 tools have been set, tools cannot be copied.
Click the [OK] button.
The selected tool will be deleted and returns to the main screen for the Tool settings.
The copied tool window with the selected status will be displayed on the copy source tool window.
Button of the copied tool Copied tool
A tool number which has not been set will be automatically assigned to the copy destination tool number.
4-32
4
MEMO
4-33
1. Image Optimization Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
Color Area/Area tool
Position Adjustment tool
Outline tool
Setting items for the Outline tool
Items Description Selects the window shape to specify an area of the target to be detected. When the window shape is set to [Rect], resets the angle of the window. Specifies an area to search the outline of a target. By specifying the smaller area as a search region, the processing time will be shortened. Setting range yyRect Specify with rectangle window. The arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified. yyCircle Specify with circle window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified. yyEntire Specifies the entire imaging area as a search region. yyPartial Specifies a search region to an arbitrary size in the imaging area. yyHigh Sensitivity Extracts an outline of the image with low contrast. Used when an outline you wish to detect cannot be extracted. yyNormal Sensitivity Extracts the standard outline. yyLow Sensitivity Reduces the extracted volume of an outline. Reduces the extracted volume of an outline that is necessary to detect. yyUndo The previous operation can be cancelled. You can undo back to 20 operations before. yyRedo Returns to the state before clicking the [Undo] button. yyClear Initializes all the disabling processes. yySize Select the size (size of the mouse cursor) for when specifying the unnecessary outlines. 0 to 100 Default value
4
Edit Window
Window Shape
Rect
Angle Reset
Entire (Without position adjustment) Partial (With position adjustment)
Search Region
The extraction sensitivity of an outline can be Sensitivity selected according to the target. Fine Tune Outline Remove Outline Limit Adjustment Match
4-34
Normal Sensitivity
Judges by disabling an unnecessary outline which interrupts the stabilized detection. Specifies by tracing an extracted outline.
Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) used in an OK/NG judgment.
70
Changes to the Test Live mode, and a threshold can Adjustment be adjusted to the best threshold while running.
* 100 indicates that outline is completely matched. Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of unmatched parts.
2. Master Registration Outline tool
3. Tool Settings
4. Output Assignment Position Adjustment tool
Setting the Outline tool
6 Set the position, size, and angle of the
tool window in accordance with the target.

settings.

Set the tool window
2 Display the main screen for the Tool

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) . yyThe window angle can be reset by the [Angle Reset].
3 Add the Outline tool.
Adding a tool (Page 4-31) The main screen for outline tool settings opens.
4 Select the shape of tool window.
7 Set a sensitivity and disable the outline

settings as needed.
Rect
Circle
5 Set a search region as needed.
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-37) Default value (Page 4-61)
8 Click the [Live Adjustment] button.
Setting a search region (Page 4-37)
The sensor turns to Test mode.
4-35
3. Tool Settings
9 Image a high-quality-target and

low-quality-target.
If the target is to be imaged using the external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, click the button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. When the button is clicked again, the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the Outline tool settings.
12 Set a tool name as needed. 13 Click the [OK] button.
Setting a tool name (Page 4-38)
4
10 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

by checking the matching rate.
<Setting example> If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-qualitytarget is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.
The system returns to the main screen for the Tool settings.
Threshold Matching rate
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyAccording to the status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or the [+]/[-] button. yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the main screen in [Program]. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14) yyFor details of the matching rate, refer to Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool (Page A-5).
4-36
3. Tool Settings
Setting a search region

When a range of the search region is to be specified, perform the following procedures.
Setting a sensitivity
According to the target, perform the following procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an outline is selected.
1 Select [Partial].
1 Select the extraction sensitivity of the
outline from the pull-down menu of the [Sensitivity]

The outline which cannot be extracted
4
The editing screen for a search region opens.
2 Set the tool window indicates the search

region.
Select [High Sensitivity] in this section.
2 Confirm an outline extracting condition

Search region
which changes according to the [Sensitivity].
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) . yyThe search region cannot be rotated.
Extracted outline
4-37
3. Tool Settings
Settings for removing outlines

Perform the following procedures to delete an unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.
Setting a tool name

An arbitrary name such as a name of target can be set to tools (up to 8 characters). A tool name can be confirmed in the main screen in [Run]. Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)
1 Click the [Remove Outline] button.
4
1 Input any name into the text box.
2 Specify an outline which detection is not

needed by dragging with the mouse.
The specified outline changes from green to yellow.
Mouse cursor (Eraser)
If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, characters might get garbled.
The removing outline extraction part (yellow)
yyThe size of mouse cursor for when specifying the unnecessary outlines can be changed in [Size]. yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 20 times.

[OK] button.
4-38
3. Tool Settings
Outline tool > Extended Functions
Extended Functions for the Outline tool

Items Description Setting range Default value Sets a range of the rotating direction to search an outline of the target. The system judges NG if an angle of the target exceeds its rotation range even if the target is the same shape. yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too wide, 0 to 180 the acceptable range of variations of angles (Unit: 1) when a target is placed can be increased. yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too narrow, the processing time can be shorten. yyThis can be used for judging the direction of the target by limiting the rotation range. yyON The tool window will search with the range few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. yyOFF The tool window will search only within the set rotation range.
Rotation Range
20
4
Margin
yySelect whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle set in Rotation Range.
ON
Search Algorithm
The detection mode of the Outline tool can be selected according to the target.
yyHigh Accuracy Differences in outlines can be detected with a high degree of accuracy. yyHigh Speed High Outlines can be judged faster Accuracy than in high accuracy mode. There may be the influence from the background or unnecessary outlines other than the target.
Rotation Range

set a rotation range of the Outline tool.

[Settings] tab.
The system returns to the main screen for Outline tool settings.
4-39
3. Tool Settings
Outline tool > Extended Functions
Margin
Search Algorithm

select a margin of the Outline tool.

select a search algorithm type (High Accuracy/High Speed).
4
yySelect [ON] when detection is not stable because of the influence of the rotation angle of the target. The tool window will search with the range few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0) yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.

[Settings] tab.
yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not stable because of a small difference in the matching rate of a high and low-qualitytarget. yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not stable because of the influence of an unnecessary outline other than the target such as the background. yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing time.

[Settings] tab.
4-40
4
MEMO
4-41
3. Tool Settings

Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool
Items Description Setting range yyRect Specifies with the rectangular window. An arbitrary size, position, and angle can be specified. yyCircle Specifies with the circular window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified. yyEntire The entire area (imaging area) of an image displayed in the PC becomes the extraction target. Default value
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) Window Shape Select the window shape to specify an area of the target to be extracted.
Rect
Angle Reset Edit Window Mask

4-42
When the window shape is set to [Rect], resets the angle of the window.
Add Mask
Cut Mask
Adds a rectangular/circular mask region in the tool yyRect window frame. Inside the Specifies a rectangular mask mask region is excluded region or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary size, position, and angle from an area extraction can be specified. target. yyCircle Adds a rectangular/circular Specifies a circular mask region or cutting region in the mask a mask cutting region. An arbitrary region. Inside the mask size and position can be specified. cutting region, the mask is yySetting counts Adding or cutting the mask can be disabled and it becomes set up to 20 times. the target of the area extraction. The previous operation can be cancelled. You can undo back to 20 operations before. Deletes the mask region which has been set. -
Rect
Undo
Clear
3. Tool Settings
Items
Description
Setting range
Default value
Color Extraction (For color type)
Sets an extraction range by clicking the color to be extracted in the master image or Live image.
yyExtract Area [+] Expands an range of the color to be extracted and expands an extraction area. yyExtract Area [-] Contracts a range of the color to be extracted and narrows an extraction area. (No extraction) yyUndo The previous operation can be cancelled. yyClear Cancels the selection of the extracted color. yyto Live Image The color range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target. yyBrightness Range Sets the upper and the lower limit of brightness in a range within 0 to 255 with the clicked brightness as a reference. yyUndo The previous operation can be (No extraction) cancelled. yyClear Cancels the selection of the extracted brightness. yyto Live Image A brightness range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target. 0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting is OFF) yyON (checked) Activates the upper limit setting. yyOFF (not checked) Deactivates the upper limit setting. yy0 - 200 Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a range within 0 to 200. yy0 - 999 Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a range within 0 to 999. 50
4
Brightness Extraction (For monochrome type)
Sets an extraction range by clicking brightness to be extracted in the master image or Live image.
Match
Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) used in the OK/NG judgment. Sets the upper limit of the threshold. Set when the OK/NG judgment is desired when the target area is larger than the OK area. When the upper limit of the threshold is ON, select the threshold scale in accordance with the range of the matching rate required for the judgment. Changes to the Test mode, and the threshold can be adjusted to the best threshold while running.
Upper Limit Limit Adjustment
Disable
Scale
0 - 200
Live Adjustment
* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.
4-43
3. Tool Settings
Setting the Color Area/Area tool
6 Perform the mask setting as needed.
2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.
4
3 Add the Color Area/Area tool. 4
Adding a tool (Page 4-31) The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings opens.
Mask settings (Page 4-47)
Select a tool window shape.
For color type zz
7 Set an area to be the target to extract.

Click the [Setup] button of the color extraction.
Rect
Circle
The screen to select a color to be extracted opens. Click the color to be the reference of judgment for the area.
Click
When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will be hidden.
5 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.
The clicked color will be extracted.
Set the tool window
For details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) .
4-44
3. Tool Settings
yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted are clicked repeatedly, the extraction range can be added. yyClick the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range, and the range of color to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.
yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been extracted are clicked repeatedly, the extraction range can be added. yyAdjust the slider, and the range of brightness to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.
4
yyBy clicking the [to Live Image] button, the range of the color to be extracted can be set with the Live Image of the target. yyTo re-extract the color, click the [Clear] button and then click the color to be the reference of judgment again. After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen to set the Color Area tool settings. Click the [Setup] button of the Brightness Extraction.
yyBy clicking the [to Live Image] button, the range of brightness to be extracted can be set with the Live Image of the target. yyTo re-extract brightness, click the [Clear] button and then click brightness to be the reference of judgment again. After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen for the Area tool settings.
The screen to select brightness to be extracted opens. Click brightness to be the reference of judgment for the color area.
Click
The sensor turns to Test mode.
The clicked brightness will be extracted.

4-45
3. Tool Settings
9 Image a high-quality-target and

low-quality-target.
If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, click the button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.
11 Set the upper limit as needed.

[OK] button.
Setting the upper limit (Page 4-48)

The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings.
4
When the
button is clicked again,
the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.
13 Set the tool name as needed.
Setting a tool name (Page 4-38)
10 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection 14 Click the [OK] button.

<Setting example> If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90. The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
Threshold
Matching rate
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyIn accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or with the [+]/[-] button. yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the main screen in [Program]. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
4-46
3. Tool Settings
Mask settings
Perform the following procedures if a mask region is to be specified in the tool window.
mask shape in accordance with the target.
1 Click the [Mask] button.
Set the mask shape
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) For details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) .
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.

[OK] button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.
6 Click the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask

region.
3 Select the mask shape.
7 Select the clip shape.
4-47
3. Tool Settings
cutting shape in accordance with the target.
Setting the upper limit

To perform the OK/NG judgment when an area of the target is wider than an area of a high-qualitytarget, perform the following procedures.
Set clip shape
1 Place a check mark

the upper limit.
to the check box of
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) For details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) .

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the extended functions settings.
The slider to set the upper limit and the lower limit of the threshold will be displayed. Select the Settings scale from [0-200] or [0-999] in accordance with the range of the matching rate necessary for judgment.
2 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

Area not to be masked
Area to be masked
10 Repeat steps 2 to 9 as needed and set the

mask region.

[Settings] tab.
The system returns to the main screen to set the Color Area/Area tool.
Threshold (lower limit) Matching rate Threshold (upper limit)
yyJudged OK when the matching rate is within a threshold range, and NG when it is outside the range. yyIn accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or the [+]/[-] button. yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the main screen in [Program]. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
4-48
3. Tool Settings
Setting the tool name

An arbitrary name such as a name of a target can be set to tools (up to 8 characters). The tool name can be confirmed in the main screen in [Run]. Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)
1 Input any name into the text box.
4
If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, characters might be garbled.
4-49
3. Tool Settings
Color Area/ Area tool > Extended Functions
Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool

Items Description Setting range yyH (hue) 0 to 359 (both starting point and ending point) yyS (saturation) 0 to 255 yyB (brightness) 0 to 255 to Live Image A color/brightness range to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target. yyDisable Matches the area extracted from the master image as the criteria of a rate of 100%. yyEnable: Large Matches 1/10th of the total sensor view as the criteria of a rate of 100%. yyEnable: Small Matches 1/100th of the total sensor view as the criteria of a rate of 100%. Default value
4
Advanced Color Extraction (For color type only)
Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).
Fixed Reference Area
Select a condition which the matching rate of the Color Area/ Area is 100%.
Disable
4-50
3. Tool Settings
Advanced settings for color extraction Fixed Reference Area (for color type only)

click the [Setup] button of [Advanced Color Extraction].
Select [Enable] if the color to be judged in the master image cannot be detected. The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool Auto Tuning target.
4
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and click

the [Setup] button of [Fixed Reference Area].
2 Specify the color or brightness of the

extraction target.
2 Select a condition which the matching rate

of the Color Area/Area tool will be 100%. and click [OK] button.
When the [to Live Image] button is clicked, the range of the color to be extracted can be set on the Live image of the target.

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the extended functions settings.
4 Click the [Settings] tab.
The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings. The system returns to the main screen for the extended functions settings.
4-51
3. Tool Settings
3 Extract the color/brightness range to be

judge. Extract from the Live image zz
Select the [Settings] tab and click [Setup] button of the Color/Brightness Extraction. By clicking the [to Live Image] button, extract the color/brightness range to be judged from LIVE image.
Extract from the master image, and then zz move the tool window
Select the [Settings] tab and move the tool window. By clicking the [Setup] button of the Color/ Brightness Extraction, extract the color/ brightness range to be judged. Click the [OK] button and move the tool window to the position where the color/brightness is to be judged.
4
The color to be extracted can be specified by using HSB (H:hue, S:saturation, B:brightness) in [Advanced settings for color extraction]. Advanced settings for color extraction (for color type only) (Page 4-51)
Extract the color/brightness

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the Color Area/Area tool settings.
Move
4-52
3. Tool Settings

If there are varies of the position determining of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly. The amount that the target is off-centered in regards to the master image will be calculated by the internal sensor and corrected by the position adjustment tool, so the off-centered position can be detected correctly even if the position was off-centered. Tool settings Master image Run Position adjustment process
4
Tool window Position adjustment window Search region of the tool window
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being used, the processing time will be longer. yyIn the case of the outline tool, the search range position will be adjusted. The outline of a target is searched in adjusted search range and the searched outline will be judged. yyUsed when an area of the target to be examined and a relative position of the target are determined and when there is variability in determining the position (position or angle) of a target. For example, intended purposes are shown below. - For package box, whether or not the seal is put in the determined area and direction. - For components, whether logos/symbols/insignias are in-print or not. yyIf the position adjustment fails, the result of position adjustment is NG. In this case, the total status result is NG. The individually set detection tool will not be judged. Failure of position adjustment can be checked with position adjustment output. Review the position adjustment settings and position determining accuracy for a target. 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60) yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the following settings for the detection tools have been set will be changed. - Outline tool : When the search region is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default value in which the position adjustment is enabled. - Color Area/Area tool : When the window shape is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default value in which the position adjustment is enabled. yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in one program. By setting the position adjustment, the position adjustment will be applied to all detection tools. Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment yyFor details of matching rate, refer to Tool (Page A-5).
4-53
3. Tool Settings
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool

Items Description Setting range Default value
4
Edit Window
Window Shape
yyRect Specifies with the rectangular window. An Select a shape of the arbitrary size, position, and angle can be window to specify the range specified. of a target to be the position yyCircle adjustment reference. Specifies with the circular window. An arbitrary size and position can be specified. When the window shape is set to [Rect], resets the angle of the window. -
Rect
Angle Reset
Search Region
Specifies a area to search yyEntire a target to be a reference Specifies entire imaging area as a search of position adjustment. By region. specifying the narrower area as yyPartial a search region, the processing Specifies a search region to an arbitrary time will be shortened. size in the imaging area. yyHigh Sensitivity Extracts an outline of the image with low contrast. Used when an outline you wish to detect cannot be extracted. yyNormal Sensitivity Extracts the standard outline. yyLow Sensitivity Reduces the extracted volume of an outline. Reduces the extracted volume of an outline that not necessary to detect.
Entire
Sensitivity Fine Tune Outline Remove Outline Limit Adjustment Match Live Adjustment
4-54
The extraction sensitivity of an outline can be selected according to a target.
Normal Sensitivity
yyUndo The previous operation can be cancelled. You can undo back to 20 operations before. Unnecessary outlines yyRedo which obstruct the steady Returns to the state before clicking the Not position adjustments can [Undo] button. specified be disabled. Specifies by yyClear tracing the extracted outline. Initializes all the disabling processes. yySize Select the size (size of the mouse cursor) for when specifying the unnecessary outlines. Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) which judges whether 0 to 100 or not the position adjustment is succeeded. Changes to the Test mode, and the threshold can be adjusted to the best threshold while running. 70
* 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched. Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts.
3. Tool Settings
Setting the position adjustment tool
6 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.

settings.

Set the tool window
2 Display the main screen for the Tool

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) Set the position and size of tool window as large as possible by selecting the part that is dissimilar in shape. Stabilizing the position adjustment (Page 5-34) For details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) .
3 Add the Position Adjustment tool. 4 Select the tool window shape.
Adding a tool (Page 4-31) The main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings opens.
7 Set the sensitivity and disable outline

settings as needed.
Rect Circle
5 Set a search region as needed.
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-37) Settings for removing outlines (Page 4-38)
Setting a search region (Page 4-57)
4-55
3. Tool Settings
10 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not

the position adjustment is succeeded by checking the matching rate.
4
The sensor turns to the Test mode.
9 Image a target.
Threshold Matching rate
yyIf there are many variation of target shapes that a tool window has been set to, set the threshold to a lower matching rate. yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyIn accordance with status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed using the slider or the [+]/[-] button. yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment] of the main screen in [Program]. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
4-56
3. Tool Settings
Setting a search region

To limit a range (adjusting range of position adjustment) to search a target to be a reference, set it in the search region settings. When a range of the search region is to be specified, perform the following procedures.
Setting a sensitivity
According to the target, perform the following procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an outline is selected.
1 Select the extraction sensitivity of an
Select [Partial].
outline from the pull-down menu of the [Sensitivity]

The outline which cannot be extracted
4
The editing screen for a search region opens.
2 Set the tool window indicates a search

region of the tool window.
Select [High Sensitivity] in this section.
2 Confirm an outline extracting condition

which changes in accordance with the [Sensitivity].
Search region
Extracted outline
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to Editing the tool window (Page 3-12) . yyThe search region cannot be rotated.
4-57
3. Tool Settings
Settings for disabling outlines

Perform the following procedures to delete an unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.

[OK] button.
1 Click the [Remove Outline] button.
4
2 Specify an unnecessary outline in the
basic shape of position adjustment by dragging with the mouse.

The specified outline changes from green to yellow.
Mouse cursor (Eraser)
The outline that the outline extraction has disabled (yellow)
yyThe size of mouse cursor for when specifying the unnecessary outlines can be changed in [Size]. yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 20 times.
4-58
2. Master Registration Color Area/Area tool
3. Tool Settings
Position Adjustment tool > Extended Functions
Extended Functions for the Position Adjustment tool

Items Description Setting range Default value Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction. The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range. 0 to 180 yyIf the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable (Unit: 1) range of variation in angles when a target is placed. y If the setting of rotation range is too narrow, the y processing time can be shorten. yyON The tool window will search with the range few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. yyOFF The tool window will search only within the set rotation range.
Rotation Range
20
4
Margin
Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle set in Rotation Range.
ON
Rotation Range

set the rotation range of the Position Adjustment tool.
Margin
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and set

the margin of the Position Adjustment tool.

[Settings] tab.
The system returns to the main screen for the Position Adjustment tool settings. yy Select [ON] when the position adjustment is not stable because of the influence of the rotation angle of the target. The tool window will search with the range few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0.) yy Select [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.
2 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.

4-59
3. Tool Settings
4. Output Assignment ( Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)

Set the output items to be assigned to the output line (OUT1 to OUT4). Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor (Page 2-8) Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line (Page 8-1)
Main screen for the Output Assignment

(1)
4
(2) (3) (4) (6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Title Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) [Image type] display Displays the image type. Displays the master image yyMaster............... (still image). (4) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the image taken by the sensor. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (5) Master image Displays the master image.
(6) Tool settings button yy[Output Assignment] tab Assigns the output item to each output line. Setting the Output Assignment (Page 4-61) y [Extended Functions] tab y Sets the total status conditions and logics. Setting the Total Status Conditions (Page 4-63) Setting Logics (Page 4-64) (7) [Valid]/[Invalid] setting for the trigger error output Select whether to enable/disable the output when the trigger error occurred. Error Messages (Page A-19) (8) [Back] button Returns to the Tool settings screen. 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28) (9) [Complete] button Finishes the Settings Navigator. Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
4-60
3. Tool Settings Output Assignment
Setting range of the Output Assignment

Setting range OFF Description Do not output. Output function will be constantly OFF.
Setting the Output Assignment

Assignment.
When the total status result of the tools which have been set was OK, the output function turns ON. Total Status The condition of the total status can be selected from [All Tools OK] / [Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. Tot. StatusNG RUN When the total status result was NG, the output function turns ON. When the sensor is running with no system error occurred, the output function turns ON. The output function turns ON when the system is in a state that cannot input additional trigger; such as during imaging, judging processing, switching programs, and registering external master images. The output function turns ON when an error is occurred; such as system error, memory read out error for start-up, external master registration error, and trigger error (when the trigger settings are enabled).
2 Display the main screen for the Output

4
3 Click the item name of output line to
perform output assignment and select the output item.
BUSY
Error
When position adjustment Position processing is finished normally, the Adjustment output function turns ON. Tool 01 to 16 Logic 1 to 4 When the status result of specified tool is OK, the output function turns ON. Status results can be output by each tool. When the status result of specified logic is OK, the output function turns ON.
4 Finishes the Settings Navigator.
Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
Default value
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Trigger Error : Total Status (N.O.) : BUSY (N.O.) : Error (N.C.) : OFF : OFF
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed. Output Settings (Page 6-27) yyThe input cable assignment can be changed. Input Settings (Page 6-26)
4-61
1. Image Optimization Output Assignment
2. Master Registration Extended Functions
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions for the Output Assignment

Extended functions items for the Output Assignment
Items Description Setting range Default value
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) Total Status Conditions Selects a condition for the total status result. The total status result is displayed in accordance with the selected condition.
yyAll Tools OK When all of the status results of the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON. yyAny Tools OK When any of the status results of All Tools OK the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON. yyLogic 1 to 4 When the status result of the set logic was OK, the total status output function turns ON. yyUnused The selected items are not used in a logical formula. yyUsed When the status results of the selected items were OK, the total status output function turns ON. yyUsed (Inverse) When the status results of the selected items were NG, the total status output function turns ON. yyAND Calculates the logical multiply (AND) of all selected items. yyOR Calculates the logical sum (OR) of all selected items.
Logic Settings
Assigns the logical operation results of each detection tool to the output function. Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can be defined.
Unused
Logic
Selects the logical operation method of logics.
AND
4-62
Setting the Total Status Conditions
Logic 1 to 4 zz
When the status result of the defined logic was OK, the total status output function turns ON.
Logic OK 1 to 4 NG Total OK Status NG Image of total status output when the total status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]

select a total status condition.
4
The total status result is displayed in accordance with the selected condition.
All Tools OK zz
When all of the detection tools were OK, the total status output function turns ON.
Tool A Tool B OK NG OK NG
yyWhen the position adjustment failed, the status result of each tool is NG. yyIf the Area tool window is protruded from the imaging area when position adjustment succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and the status result is NG.
2 When the setting is completed, click the

[Output Assignment] tab.
The system returns to the main screen for the Output Assignment settings.
Total OK Status NG Image of total status output when the total status condition is [All Tools OK]
Any Tools OK zz
When any of the detection tools was OK, the total status output function turns ON.
Tool A Tool B OK NG OK NG
Total OK Status NG Image of total status output when the total status condition is [Any Tools OK]
For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the position adjustment is not included in the total status conditions.
4-63
1. Image Optimization Output Assignment
2. Master Registration Extended Functions
3. Tool Settings
Setting Logics

select a total status condition.
yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic output is the logical multiply (AND) of the status results of each selected item. yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic output is the logical sum (OR) of the status results of each selected item.
4
4 Select items to be integrated into the

logic.
2 Click the number which the logic
The status result of the logic is calculated from OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used (Inverse)] has been set.
judgement condition is to be defined.
Logic : AND zz
Tool A Tool B Tool C (Inverse) Logic 1 to 4
Each Logic Settings screen appears. When an undefined detection tool has been defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is selected.] is displayed on the right side of the logic number.
Image of logic output when the Logic is [AND]
Tool A OK NG OK NG OK NG OK NG
Tool B
OK OK NG NG OK OK NG NG
Tool C
OK OK OK OK NG NG NG NG
Logic NG NG NG NG OK NG NG NG
3 Select the logical operation method of the

logic.
4-64
Logic : OR zz
Tool A Tool B Tool C (Inverse) Logic 1 to 4
5 When the setting is completed, click the

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the Extended Functions settings.
Image of logic output when the Logic is [OR]
6 Click the [Output Assignment] tab.
The system returns to the main screen for the Output Assignment settings.
Tool A
Tool B OK OK NG NG OK OK NG NG
Tool C OK OK OK OK NG NG NG NG
Logic
4
OK NG OK NG OK NG OK NG
OK OK OK NG OK OK OK OK
yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used (Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/ Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4). yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items were OK, the status output function for items in the logic turns ON. yyWhen the status results of the [Used (Inverse)] items were NG, the status output function for items in the logic turns ON. yyTo define a logic which has been set to another logic, use the logic number which is greater than the logic number which has been set. For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4 in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic. When the program number has been changed and you went to [Run] from [Program] after the power ON, the judgement is not done if no trigger input. The judgement output of each tool is OFF.
4-65
4-66
MEMO
5
Operating/Adjusting
This chapter explains the procedures for starting the operation, the names and functions of each part displayed in [Run] main screen and the adjustment procedures to fully utilize the judgment ability of the IV Series.
Starting an Operation.........................................5-2 Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]....5-3 Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program]................................................5-4 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment...............5-14 Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)..........................................................5-15 Stabilizing the Judgment Process..................5-29 Shortening the Processing Time....................5-37
5
Operating/Adjusting
5-1
Starting an Operation
Starting an Operation
Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator. The sensor can be independently operated.
Turning on the power and starting an operation
Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and boot

up IV-Navigator.
1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as

Settings Navigator.
Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5) The main screen in [Program] opens.
5
Operating/Adjusting
Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection) (Page 3-6) Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection) (Page 3-6)
2 Click the [Run] button.
2 Confirm that main screen in [Run] opens.
The main screen of [Run] appears and starts running. If the image or status result does not update, refer to Troubleshooting (Page A-16). If the image or status result does not update, refer to Troubleshooting (Page A-16).
5-2
Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]
Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]

Main screen in [Run]
(Page 5-4)
Tool information display

Displays the threshold/judgment value by tools and the histogram for status result. (Page 5-12)
5
Operating/Adjusting Statistical information display
Displays statistical information of status results. (Page 5-10)
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup)

Sets the program to use for judgment. (Page 4-1)
Main screen in [Program]

(Page 5-4)
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the threshold for tools. (Page 5-14)
Tool Auto Tuning
Based on OK/NG images, automatically adjusts the extraction condition for threshold for tools and the Color Area/Area tool. (Page 5-15)
5-3
Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program]

Main screen in [Run] / [Program]
Main screen in [Run] zz
(1) (7) (8) (9) (10) (15) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (17) (18) (16) (19) (12) (14) (20)
Main screen in [Program] zz

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
5
Operating/Adjusting
(11) (12) (13) (14)
(1) [Run] / [Program] switch button Switches the main screen in [Run] and [Program]. yyBy clicking the [Program] button on the main screen in [Run], the operation stops and switches to the main screen in [Program]. yyBy clicking the [Run] button on the main screen in [Program], the setting finishes and switches to the main screen in [Run]. (2) Program information Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). Programs can be switched from the pull-down menu. (3) [Detail] button Displays the Program Details screen. Displaying the Program Details screen (Page 6-11) (4) [Image Hist] button Displays the Sensors internal image history screen. Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15) (5) [I/O Settings] button Displays the I/O Settings screen. Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor (Page 6-26) (6) [Advanced] button Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen. Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor (Page 6-30)
5-4
(7) Menu bar Operating from the menu bar (Page 6-45) (8) Status bar In the main screen in [Run], the total status result, trigger type, and processing time are displayed. yyIf the total status result is OK, OK will be displayed. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/ [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. yyIf the total status result is NG, NG will be displayed. yyProcessing time indicates the time from receiving the external or internal trigger until determining the status result. In the case of the One-Shot output (Page 6-27), the ON-Delay Time is not included. In the main screen in [Program], the image type (Master) and trigger type are displayed. (9) Image tool bar Displays the tool for operating the image displayed on the IV-Navigator. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (10) Tool window Displays the selected tool region with a green frame when the status result is OK, and displays with a red frame when the status result is NG. You can also switch the selected tool by clicking the designated region. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
(11) Search region If the search region of the selected tool is being set to Partial, the search region will be displayed with a light blue frame. If the position adjustment is being set, the search region after position adjustment will be displayed. (12) Brightness correction region When the brightness correction is being set, the brightness correction region will be displayed with a blue frame. (13) Statistical information display Displays the statistical information of the status result (default value: hidden). Displaying the statistical information (Page 5-10) (14) Sensor Information Displays the model, device name (Page 6-31), connection method ([Direct connection] or [IP address of network connection]) (Page 6-32), and MAC address (Page 6-31) for the sensor. (15) Status gauge Displays the status gauge by tools which have been set. Displaying the tool information (Page 5-12) (16) Tool information ([Match] tab) Displays the information for the selected tool. Displaying the tool information (Page 5-12) (17) [Sensor Setup] button Displays the Settings Navigator screen. Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3) (18) [Limit Adjustment] button Displays the Limit Adjustment screen. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14) (19) [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button Displays the Tool Auto Tuning screen for auto tuning. Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15) (20) Master image display Displays the master image registered to the currently selected program. If no master image is registered, [No Master Image] will be displayed.
yy"Lock Enabled" will be displayed in the lower right of the main screen in [Run] if the password lock is being set.
Password is required when while switching to the [Program] main screen. Security (Page 6-34) yySearch area and tool window will be hidden when you select [OFF] for display methods for tools (Page 5-7).
5
Operating/Adjusting
5-5
Enlarging the image display

The display magnification of images can be changed.
Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed

There are two methods for selecting tools, whose information you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool from the status gauge and (2) clicking the tool region on the image.
1 Change the magnification ratio to the

desired ratio by clicking the button. or
Selecting the tool from the status gauge

to display from the status gauge.
1 Click the tool whose information you wish
5
Operating/Adjusting
For details of the image tool bar, refer to Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) .
2 Adjust the display position of the enlarged

image as needed.
yyDrug the image to change the display position enlarged image. or button after yyIf you click the changing the display position, the image will be enlarged/reduced with reference to the center of the displayed image.
Click the tool
Information of the selected tool will be displayed.

Selected tool
Information of the selected tool
Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image

Selected tool
Click the tool
Information of the clicked tool will be displayed.

clicked tool
Information of the clicked tool
5-6
Selecting a display method for tools

If you select a tool display method from the tool display pull-down menu, the display method for tools changes in accordance with the selected item.
Display methods for tools

Depending on the type of the sensor (color or monochrome type), selectable display methods are different.
1 Select the display method from display

method pull-down menu in accordance with the intended purpose.
For color type

OFF zz
5
Operating/Adjusting
The display method for tools changes in accordance with the selected menu. For details of the tool display methods, refer to Display methods for tools (Page 5-7).
The tool windows and search regions of all tools become hidden.
Window zz
Selected tool yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thick line. If the mask region is set to the Color Area tool, the region that the tool window and mask region are combined will be displayed. yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light blue. Non selected tools yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thin line. yyThe search region and mask region will not be displayed. Common When the result of position adjustment and the status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one of the results is NG, the tool will be displayed in red. Displays the brightness correction window in blue.
5-7
Process 1 zz
For monochrome type

OFF zz
Inside the tool window Outside the tool window
5
Operating/Adjusting
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool yyOutline tool Displays inside the tool window in monochrome, and outside of the tool window in color. Indicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). If the brightness correction has been set, inside the tool window is displayed with the corrected brightness. yyColor Area tool Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or red (NG).
The tool windows and search regions of all tools become hidden.
Window zz
Process 2 zz
Inside the search region Outside the search region
Selected tool yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thick line. If the mask region is set to the Area tool, the region that the tool window and mask region are combined will be displayed. yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light blue. Non selected tools yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thin line. yyThe search region and the mask region will not be displayed. Common When the result of position adjustment and the status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one of the results is NG, the tool will be displayed in red. Displays the brightness correction window in blue.
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool yyOutline tool Displays inside the tool window and search region in monochrome, and outside of the search region in color. If the brightness correction has been set, inside the search region is displayed with the corrected brightness. yyColor Area tool Displays inside the tool window in monochrome. The extracted region is displayed in the color of the target.
5-8
Process zz
Process 2 zz
Inside the search region Outside the search region
This is selectable for the Area tool and for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has not been set. Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool yyOutline tool Indicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). yyArea tool Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or red (NG). If the brightness correction has been set, inside the tool window will be displayed with the corrected brightness and outside of the tool window will be displayed with brightness before correction.
This is selectable for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has been set. Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool Displays inside the search region with brightness corrected and outside of the search region with brightness before correction.
5
Operating/Adjusting
Process 1 zz
Inside the tool window Outside the tool window
This is selectable for the Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has been set. Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the following are different. The rest are the same. Selected tool Indicates the recognized outline with a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). Displays inside the tool window with the corrected brightness and outside the tool window with brightness before correction.
5-9
Displaying the statistical information

When the [Statistics] button in the [View] menu is selected, the statistical information of judgment is displayed.
Displaying the statistical information
1 Select [View] [Statistics] on menu bar
to place a check mark next to [Statistics].
5
Operating/Adjusting
(3) Trigger count information Displays the information related to the number of triggers. Displays the total number of yyTrigger No......... triggers issued. This number does not include the number of trigger errors. Displays the number of yyOK..................... triggers issued with the total status OK. Displays the number of yyNG..................... triggers issued with the total status NG. Displays the number of triggers yyTrigErrorNo....... issued as error triggers. (4) [Reset Stat.] button Resets the statistical information and histograms. yyYou can copy the statistical information to clipboard by right-clicking in the statistical information screen. yyThe upper limit of Trigger No. is 999999. When the number exceeds the upper limit, the counter resets to 0 and starts counting again. yyThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrorNo is 999999. The values display stops updating when the upper limit is reached. yyThe statistical information is reset under the following conditions. - When the [Reset Stat.] button is clicked - When the power of the sensor is turned OFF - When the tool is added/deleted/copied - When the upper limit of the Color Area/Area tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting scale is changed by the user operation or Tool Auto Tuning - When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if more than two tools other than the position adjustment tool are being set - When the program is switched - When each correction of the setup adjustment is started - When the sensor is initialized
The statistical information will be displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Contents of the statistical information are as follows. (1) OUT information Displays the latest status results of items which are assigned to an output line (OUT1 to OUT4) (Page 4-60). (2) Processing time information Displays information related to the processing time. Displays the processing time yyTIME................. of the last judgment process. Displays the maximum value of yyMAX.................. the processing time. Displays the minimum value of yyMIN................... the processing time. Displays the average value of yyAVE................... the processing time.
5-10
Hiding the statistical information
1 Select [View] [Statistics] on menu bar

to release the check mark.
5
The statistical information becomes hidden. Operating/Adjusting
5-11
Displaying the tool information

You can display or hide the selected tool information with the [View] menu. The matching rate histograms are displayed by default.
Contents of the tool information are as follows. (1) Status gauge Displays the tools set in the program. Tool name, threshold, matching rate for each tool and status result are displayed. Status result OK is displayed in green and NG is displayed in red. yyJudge is OK
Displaying the tool information
5
Operating/Adjusting
1 Select [View] [Tool Data] on menu bar
to place a check mark next to [Tool Data].
Tool Name
yyJudge is NG
Threshold Matching rate and status result
For details on the status results, refer to Displaying and outputting the status result (Page A-4). The tool information will be displayed. (2) Tool Name Displays the tool name of the selected tool. (3) Histogram Displays the histogram (frequency distribution) of the selected tool. With the threshold being a border, the range for OK is displayed in green and for NG is displayed in red. Displays the distribution yyAbscissa axis.... range of the matching rate. The display range is fixed. It cannot be specified arbitrary. Adjusted automatically in yyVertical axis....... accordance with the maximum value of the frequency. It cannot be specified arbitrary. (4) Matching rate of the latest judgment process Displays the matching rate of the latest judgment process. Click the match bar to move to the limit adjustment (Page 5-14). (5) Threshold Displays the threshold of the selected tool.
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
5-12
(6) Judgment record Displays the judgment process counts for OK or NG. Displays the process counts for "OK". yyOK.... Displays the process counts for "NG". yyNG.... If the judgment threshold is changed, the histogram is updated according to the result judged by the changed threshold. However, the counts judged by the previous threshold are displayed in the judgment record. Therefore, the judgment condition on the histogram may be different from the judgment record. (7) Matching rate information Displays the maximum value of yyMAX........... the matching rate. Displays the minimum value of the yyMIN............ matching rate. Displays the average value of the yyAVE............ matching rate.
Hiding the tool information
1 Select [View] [Tool Data] on menu bar

to release the check mark.
5
The tool information becomes hidden. Operating/Adjusting
yyThe upper limit of judgment processing count display for the judgment record is 999999. Update of the value stops when the value reached the upper limit. yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999. The values display stops updating when the upper limit is reached. yyThe histogram and judgment record are reset under the following conditions: - When the [Reset Stat.] button is clicked - When the power of the sensor is turned OFF - When the tool is added/deleted/copied - When the upper limit of the Color Area/Area tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting scale is changed by the user operation or Tool Auto Tuning - When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if more than two tools other than the position adjustment tool are being set - When the program is switched - When each correction of the setup adjustment is started - When the sensor is initialized yy[Reset Stat.] button is displayed together with the statistical information. Displaying the statistical information (Page 5-10)
5-13
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

The method for manually adjusting the threshold while in the Test mode. The threshold can be adjusted by the Limit Adjustment in the tool settings of the Settings Navigator.
5 Adjust the threshold by checking the

matching rate.
<Setting example> If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.
1 Open the main screen in [Program].
5
Operating/Adjusting
Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program] (Page 5-3)
2 Click the [Limit Adjustment] button.
Adjust the threshold Matching rate
The [Limit Adjustment] button is available when the program that the tool has been set is selected. The Limit Adjustment screen appears.
3 If multiple tools are set in the program,

select the tool to adjust the threshold.
Select the tool
4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be

the reference of judgment.
If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, click the button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. When the button is clicked again, the imaging with the internal trigger finishes.
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is greater than the threshold, and detected as NG if the matching rate is lower than the threshold. yyIn accordance with the status result of the tool, the display color of the tool changes. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) yyThe threshold can be changed by using the slider or inputting values. yyA target is judged by the new threshold from the judgment process of the trigger output after the threshold is changed. yyThe threshold can be adjusted by checking the histogram result. The displayed contents during threshold adjustment are as follows. - The histogram before threshold adjustment is displayed. - The status results during threshold adjustment are not added to the frequency distribution of the histogram. - The judgment record and the matching rate information (Page 5-12) are not displayed.
6 After the adjustment is completed, click

the [Complete] button.
When the threshold is changed, the save settings confirmation dialog appears. When the [Yes] button is clicked, the settings will be saved, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].
5-14
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
Tool Auto Tuning ( Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool and the judgment threshold for each tool by using multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and lowquality-targets (NG images). There are three methods to register the image to be used for Tool Auto Tuning.
Using the image history saved in the sensor

This is the method to register the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images read from the Sensors internal image history. Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15)
Using the images taken in the Test mode

This is the method to register the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and low-qualitytarget and checking the results of the test operation.
Sensors internal image history
5
Operating/Adjusting
Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK or NG from the Sensors internal image history
Using the image files saved in the PC

This is the method to register the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images read from the PC. Batch backup files (*.iva) and image capture files (*.ivp) can be used. Backing up in a batch (Page 6-21) Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually (Page 6-22)
Batch backup file (*.iva) Image capture file (*.ivp)
OK NG OK OK NG Perform tuning by imaging targets which are judged as OK or NG
Perform tuning by reading the images are judged as OK or NG from PC.
5-15
Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning

Start
The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning

Contents of the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning are as follows.
(1)
Select the tool

(2)
(3) (4) (5)
5
Operating/Adjusting Yes
5-16
Image a target
(6)
(7)
Judgment of an image?
Low-quality-target
(8)
(9)
(10)
High-quality-target
AutoTune as OK
AutoTune as NG
(1) Tool panel Displays the name and threshold of Tool Auto Tuning target. If you select an image in [OK Image List] or [NG Image List], its judgment value and status result will be displayed. (2) [Perform Image Registration] button The image registration method screen is displayed by clicking the [Perform Image Registration] button. Select a registration method and perform Tool Auto Tuning. Register the images taken with the sensor (Page 5-19) Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor (Page 5-21) Registering the image files saved in the PC (Page 5-23) (3) [Show] button Displays the display screen and displays the selected image in [OK Image List] or [NG Image List]. Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-26)
Automatically adjust the judgment condition and threshold
Add image? No
Finish * There are three methods to prepare images. * Up to 24 images can be used for tuning.
(4) [Delete] button Deletes the selected image from the [OK Image List] or [NG Image List]. Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-26) (5) Display Master Image Display the master image that is currently registered. (6) [OK Image List] / [NG Image List] Displays the image thumbnails registered as OK image or NG image. (7) [Test Running] button Displays the test operation screen and perform the test operation in accordance with the OK image / NG image registered in Tool Auto Tuning. Confirming the registration results in the test mode (Page 5-27) (8) Registration information file name Displays the registration information file name for saving the result of Tool Auto Tuning . (9) [Other Tools] button If multiple tools are set in the program, a tool selection screen will be displayed. (10) [Exit] button Saves the registered OK image / NG image and returns to the main screen in [Program].
Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning

Displays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from the main screen in [Program] to perform Tool Auto Tuning. yyThe position adjustment tool is not target for the Tool Auto Tuning. yyThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool Auto Tuning target.
5
Operating/Adjusting
2 Click the [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning]

button.
The import confirmation dialog for registration data file (*.ivm) appears.
3 Click the [No] button.
To perform the Tool Auto Tuning with registration data file (*.ivm), click the [Yes] button. For details, refer to Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information (Page 5-27).
5-17
select the tool for Tool Auto Tuning, and click the [OK] button.
7 To confirm or delete the registered images,

click the [Show] or [Delete] button.
Select the tool
5
Operating/Adjusting
The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens. The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-16)
Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-26)
8 To confirm the status result with the

registered contents, click the [Test Running] button.
5 Click the [Perform Image Registration]

button.
The image registration method screen opens.
Confirming the registration results in the test mode (Page 5-27)
6 Select the registration source of the image 9 After the setting is completed, click the
to be registered to the Tool Auto Tuning and register the image. [Exit] button.
For registration of an image taken with the zz sensor

Register the images taken with the sensor (Page 5-19)
The confirmation dialog whether or not to save the settings appears.
For registration of an image whose history zz has been saved in the sensor
Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor (Page 5-21)
For registration of an image file saved in the zz PC

Registering the image files saved in the PC (Page 5-23)
5-18
11 To save the registered image to
the registration data file (*.ivm), click the [Yes] button.

The save as screen opens. The system returns to the main screen in [Program] if you the [No] button. Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information (Page 5-27)
Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning
Register the images taken with the sensor
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and low-quality-target and checking the images imaged.
12 Select an arbitrary folder and click the

[Save] button.
The image will be saved, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].
1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning.
Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-17)
5
Operating/Adjusting

button.
3 Select [Take a Picture] and click the [OK]

button.
The image registration screen opens.
4 Image the high-quality-target to be the
criteria for OK status or low-quality-target to be the criteria for NG status, and click the [Register the image.] button.
If the target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. If an external trigger cannot be input, click the button (Page 3-11) to image the target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. When the button is clicked again, the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.
5-19
5 Check the displayed image and select the

[OK Image] or [NG Image] button. For Outline tool zz
For Area tool (monochrome type) zz
5
Operating/Adjusting By clicking the [Capture image again.] button, the system returns to the Live image to re-edit the image.
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click brightness to be the reference of judgment, or operate the slider and expand/reduce the brightness range to be extracted. yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change brightness of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click brightness to be the reference of judgment again. yyBy clicking the [Capture image again.] button, the system returns to the Live image to re-edit the image.
For Color Area tool (color type) zz
6 Click the [Registration] button.

If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the color to be the reference of judgment, or click the [+]/[-] button for extract color settings to expand/reduce the color range to be extracted. yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change the color of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click the color to be the reference of judgment again. yyBy clicking the [Capture image again.] button, the system returns to the Live image to re-edit the image.
The changes in settings after the auto tuning will be displayed. If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message to change the tool settings or the image to be registered.
7 Check the changes in settings and click

the [OK] button.
Changed settings
The confirmation dialog to register another image appears.
5-20
8 Click the [Yes] button and repeat step 2 to 7.
Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images loaded from the Sensors internal image history.
yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yyUp to 24 images can be registered.

Tuning.
9 After the registration is completed, click
the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.

The system returns to the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning. Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-17)

button.
5
Operating/Adjusting
3 Select [Selection image history] and click

the [OK] button.
4 Select the image history to be the OK or

NG image and click the [OK] button.
Select the image
5-21

[OK Image] or [NG Image] button.
The status result displayed on the screen is the status result by the settings at the time of saving the image. If the tool settings are changed after the image is saved, only the frame of the tool window will be displayed regardless of selection of the tool display method (Page 5-7). The processing status will not be displayed.
5
Operating/Adjusting
For Outline tool zz
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click brightness to be the reference of judgment, or operate the slider and expand/reduce the brightness range to be extracted. yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change brightness of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click brightness to be the reference of judgment again.
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the color to be the reference of judgment, or click the [+]/[-] button for color extraction settings to expand/reduce the color range to be extracted. yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change the color of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click the color to be the reference of judgment again.

the [OK] button.
Changed settings
5-22
8 Click the [Yes] button and repeat step 2 to 7.
Registering the image files saved in the PC

Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to perform tuning while checking the images loaded from the files saved in the PC.
yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yyUp to 24 images can be registered.

Tuning.
After the registration is completed, click the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.
The system returns to the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning. Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-17)

button.
5
Operating/Adjusting
3 Select [Selection file] and click the [OK]

button.
The open dialog appears.
4 Select the file type (the batch backup file

(*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp)) for loading images.
Select the file type
File formats other than iva or ivp cannot be loaded.
5-23
5 Select a file and click the [Open] button.

[OK Image] or [NG Image] button.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen for the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status result by the settings at the time of saving the image. Only the frame of the tool window will be displayed regardless of selection of the tool display method (Page 5-7). The processing status will not be displayed. yyFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the image will be displayed.
5
Operating/Adjusting
6 To use the batch backup file (*.iva), select

a registered image.
The selection screen for the image type opens. Select an option for [Image Type] and click the [OK] button.
For Outline tool zz
The IVA image history selection screen or the IVA master image selection screen opens. Select an image and click the [OK] button.
Select an image
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the color to be the reference of judgment, or click the [+]/[-] button for color extraction settings to expand/reduce the color range to be extracted. yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change the color of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click the color to be the reference of judgment again.
5-24
10 Click the [Yes] button and register the

images repeatedly.
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click brightness to be the reference of judgment, or operate the slider and expand/reduce the brightness range to be extracted. yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous operation can be cancelled. yyTo change brightness of extraction target, click the [Clear] button and click brightness to be the reference of judgment again.
yyIf using the batch backup file (*.iva), repeat steps 6 to 9. yyIf using the image capture file (*.ivp), repeat steps 5 to 9. y y Registering one or more OK images and NG images is recommended. yyUp to 24 images can be registered.
5
Operating/Adjusting
11 After the registration is completed, click
the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.

The system returns to the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning. Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-17)

the [OK] button.
Changed settings
5-25
Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning
Confirm or delete the OK/NG images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning.
Deleting the OK/NG images

Tuning.
Confirming the OK/NG images
2 Select the image for deletion.

Select the image
5
Operating/Adjusting
Tuning.
2 Select the image for confirmation.

Select the image
3 Click the [Delete] button.
3 Click the [Show] button.

The confirmation dialog to delete appears.

The display screen opens.
4 Confirm the selected image.

Judgment value and status result for the registered image
Image is deleted and Tool Auto Tuning is performed again. The system returns to the main screen of Tool Auto Tuning by clicking the [OK] button.
5 After the confirmation is completed, click

the [Close] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.
5-26
Confirming the registration results in the test mode

You can perform the test operation and confirm the status result with Tool Auto Tuning.
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information

When the previous Tool Auto Tuning information (registration data file (*.ivm)) is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG image registration process. It is useful for re-adjusting the tool settings and repeating the Tool Auto Tuning.
Registration data file (*.ivm)

Tuning.
2 Click the [Test Running] button.
5
Operating/Adjusting
The Text Running screen opens.
3 Confirm the status result with Tool Auto

Tuning.
Judgment value and status result for test operation
Perform tuning by loading the OK/NG images registered in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
4 After the confirmation is completed, click

the [Close] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.
2 Click the [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button.
The import confirmation dialog for registration information file (*.ivm) appears.
The screen to select a file opens.

5-27
4 Select a registration data file to load (*.ivm) 8 To add images, click the [Perform Image
and click the [Open] button.
Registration] button and register the OK/ NG images.

Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-19)

[Exit] button.
5
Operating/Adjusting
The previous information will be re-adjusted and the modified contents will be displayed.

the [OK] button.
The confirmation dialog whether or not to save the settings appears.
Changed settings
11 To save the registered image to the

The message loading completion appears.
registration information file (*.ivm), click the [Yes] button.

The save as screen opens. The system returns to the main screen in [Program] if you click the [No] button.
12 Select an arbitrary folder and click the

[Save] button.

select the target tool for the Tool Auto Tuning and click the [OK] button.
The image will be saved, and the system returns to the main screen in [Program].
Select the tool
The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens. The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-16)
5-28
Stabilizing the Judgment Process

This section explains how to adjust the device when the judgment process is not stable. To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary to take clear image of the target and adjust the detection tool such that it functions in a stable manner. yyStabilize the judgment process by clearly imaging the target (Page 5-29) - Adjust the installation distance to image the target widely - Correct the distorted image due to the installation - Make the image bright enough - Focus well - Make the image slur less - Make the glossy or metal surface shine less - Adjust the color tint (for color type only) - Make the image less influenced by the lighting condition yyStabilize by adjusting the position gap of the target (Page 5-33) yyStabilize the position adjustment (Page 5-34) yyStabilize the Outline tool (Page 5-35) yyStabilize the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-36) If the judgment process is adjusted to make it stabilize, the process time may become longer depending on the function used. Adjust the judgment process while confirming the balance within the process time.
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target

Adjusts so that the images which can clearly recognize differences between high and lowquality-target by the detection tools can be imaged.
Imaging the target widely

The judgment process stabilizes by taking a large image of the target onto the screen.
Adjusting the installed distance (WD)

Install the sensor close to the target. Install the sensor at the appropriate distance from the target upon checking the field of view and the installed distance of the sensor. Checking the view and installed distance (Page 2-2)
5
Operating/Adjusting
: Adequate
: Inadequate
Using the digital zooming function

For the monochrome type, the target can be imaged larger using the digital zooming function. Digital Zoom (monochrome type only) (Page 4-18)
5-29
Correcting the distorted images due to the installation

If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to prevent a shine on the targets surface, the target image may become trapezoidally distorted. The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion. Tilt Correction (Page 6-40)
Indicator light
Achieving adequate image brightness

If the image is too dark, the judgment process for high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright, the judgment process may become unstable. Brightness can be adjusted with Automatic Brightness Adjustment. Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
5
Operating/Adjusting
If brightness cannot be adjusted in
the Automatic Brightness Adjustment

Finer brightness adjustments can be made in Advanced Brightness Adjustment. Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
Top view
Target
Target
Lateral view
Before tilt correction
After tilt correction (vertical)
Imaging Mode zz
When High Gain is selected in the imaging mode, the brightness amplification factor increases resulting in a brighter screen.
Brightness zz
Setting a higher brightness value gives a longer exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen.
If brightness cannot be adjusted due to uneven brightness

Refer to Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface (Page 5-32).
5-30
Achieving good focus

Adjusting the focus is required to clearly image of the target. For the auto focus type, focus can be adjusted easily with the Automatic Focus Adjustment. For the manual focus type, the focus can be adjusted while confirming the image and focus indicator. Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13)
Reducing the image blur

If the image is blurred by imaging a moving target, the image blurring can be corrected by shortening the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust the exposure time with the brightness adjustment. Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
If good focus cannot be achieved by the Automatic Focus Adjustment

The focusing position may not be adjusted correctly if the image is too dark or too bright. Adjust to the applicable brightness with Automatic Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) and then perform the Automatic Focus Adjustment. If the focus still cannot be adjusted with the Automatic Focus Adjustment for the auto focus type, adjust the focus manually. When the focusing position is to be adjusted manually (Page 4-14)
5
Operating/Adjusting
Exposure Time
Imaging Mode zz
Select [High Gain] in the imaging mode so that the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen becomes brighter so that the exposure time can be shortened and the image blurring can be reduced. The image noise may increase. Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the [HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.
Brightness zz
When the value of brightness is reduced, the exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a less blurry image. By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened as the exposure time can be shortened.
Adjust the focus position by the slider.
5-31
Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface

Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a high-light intensity, the amount of light received will be saturated and the surface will shine. This section explains how to reduce the shininess.
Using the polarizing filter attachment

Use the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/ OP-87437). The optical characteristics of the polarizing filter attachment cut off the mirror reflection and reduce the shine on the targets surface. Using the polarizing filter attachment (Page 2-7)
5
Operating/Adjusting
Using the Automatic Brightness Adjustment

If the target shines, the HDR function is enabled automatically and it can be reduced by performing Automatic brightness adjustment. The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is a function that prevents light saturation in the shining area by imaging the target with a wider dynamic range. The HDR function can also be adjusted manually. Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
Installing the sensor at an angle

The built-in lighting will not reflected back into the camera, so the shine on the targets surface can be reduced. This is effective for flat-surface targets. When the sensor is installed in front of the target When the sensor is installed at an angle from the target
Using the dome attachment

Use the dome attachment (IV-D10). The dome attachment emits even diffused light from the entire circumference to the target, so that the contrast becomes less and the shine on the targets surface is reduced. This is effective for targets of all shapes. Using the dome attachment (Page 2-6)
The mirror reflection of the built-in light reflects into the camera and causes the surface to shine.
The mirror reflection of the built-in light does not reflect into the camera so no surface shine occurs.
Dome attachment Diffusion light
If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor, the image can be corrected by the tilt correction function. Tilt Correction (Page 6-40)
Target
5-32
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)

Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color type image is different from that of the target. White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-42)
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position

If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly. The detection can be stabilized by using the position adjusting function. Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-53)
Reducing the effect of illumination variation

If the detection is not stable due to the ambient light from the surroundings where the sensor is installed, the effect of the illumination variation can be reduced by the brightness correction function. If the detection cannot be stabilized with the brightness correction function, use a shielding around the sensor to prevent from the ambient light. Brightness Correction (Page 4-25)
Tool settings
Master image
5
Operating/Adjusting
Processing during an operation

Position adjustment process
Tool window Position adjustment window Search region of the tool window
5-33
Stabilizing the position adjustment

This section explains how to adjust when the position adjustment is not stable. Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-53)
If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes unstable

Search region Rotation range
Basic adjustments
Set the position adjustment window as large as possible by selecting a part that contains a unique shape. If there are many variation of a target shapes that a position adjustment window has been set, set the threshold which has lower matching rate. : Good example
5
Operating/Adjusting
Rotation range zz
yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target exceeds the rotation range (default value: 20). Rotation Range (Page 4-59) yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool window will search with the range few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0.) Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target. Margin (Page 4-59)
Position adjustment window
Since the convex part assigned in the position adjustment window does not exist in any other part of the target, the position adjustment can be performed correctly without being recognition error.
Search region zz
Broaden the search region if the variation in the position determining of the target exceeds the region to be searched. Setting a search region (Page 4-57)
: Bad example
Example 1 Example 2
If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines
Position adjustment window
The position adjustment cannot function correctly in the following examples. Example 1: The straight line that the position adjustment window is set cannot be identified uniquely because there are many similar straight lines exist in other parts of the target. Example 2: The angle section that the position adjustment window is set cannot be identified uniquely because there are many similar angle sections exist in other parts of the target.
5-34
yyThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted outlines. Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-58) yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low]. Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-57)
If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected

yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High]. Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-57) If the process remain unstable even after setting the extraction sensitivity to [Hi Sensitivity], it is necessary to adjust the exposure condition for the target. Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target (Page 5-29) yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may become stable by using the color filter. Color filters (color type only) (Page 4-18)
Stabilizing the Outline tool

This section explains how to adjust the outline tool when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets is not stable. Outline tool (Page 4-34)
Basic adjustments
yySet the tool window as large as possible by selecting a part contains a unique shape. yyIf the same or similar shapes are misrecognized, set the search region so that no outlines are searched beyond the target area. Setting a search region (Page 4-37) yyAdjust the threshold to the average of the high and low-quality-target. The judgment condition and threshold can also be optimized automatically to the most appropriate condition and value by using the Tool Auto Tuning. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14) Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)
5
Operating/Adjusting
If the outline cannot be detected when the target becomes out of position
Adjusts the search region. Broaden the search region if the varies of the position determining of the target exceeds the region to be searched. Setting a search region (Page 4-37)
If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target
yyThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted outlines. Settings for removing outlines (Page 4-38) yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low]. Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-37) yySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. Setting a search region (Page 4-37) yySet the search algorithm to [High]. Search Algorithm (Page 4-40) yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc.
5-35
If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected

yyAdjusts the rotation range. Broaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target exceeds the rotation range (default value: 20). Rotation Range (Page 4-39) yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will search with the range few degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range. (The tool window will search few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0.) Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in accordance with the set rotation angle of the target. Margin (Page 4-40)
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool

This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/ Area tool when the judgment for the high and lowquality-target is not stable. Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42)
Basic adjustments
Adjust the threshold to the average of the high and low-quality-target. The color extraction range, brightness extraction range and threshold can also be optimized automatically to the most appropriate ranges and values by using the Tool Auto Tuning. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14) Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)
5
Operating/Adjusting
If the match rate difference between the high and low-quality-targets is small
Adjusts the search algorithm. If there is no difference between the match rate for high and low-quality-target, select the [Hi accuracy]. This will result in better judgment accuracy. However, the processing time becomes longer. Search Algorithm (Page 4-40)
If the color you wish to judge cannot be extracted

yyClick and extract the color or brightness to be the reference for judgment. yyBy repeatedly clicking the un-extracted color or brightness, the extraction range can be added. yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons). Click the [+] button to expand the color or brightness range currently being extracted. Click the [-] button to reduce the range. Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-44) yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable]. Extended Functions of the Color Area/ Area tool (Page 4-50)
If the outline of the target cannot be detected

yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High]. Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-37) If the process remain unstable even after setting the extraction sensitivity to [High Sensitivity], it is necessary to adjust the exposure condition for the target. Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target (Page 5-29) yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may become stable by using the color filter. Color filters (color type only) (Page 4-18)
If the area search becomes unstable
due to unwanted colors being extracted

Adjusts with the mask function. The region in which unwanted colors are extracted can be masked. Mask settings (Page 4-47)
5-36
Shortening the Processing Time

This section explains how to adjust the device to shorten the processing time. To shorten the processing time, perform adjustments to shorten the processing times of the imaging process and the detection tools. yyShorten the imaging processing time (Page 5-38) yyShorten the processing time of the detection tools (Page 5-38) yyShorten the processing time of the Outline tool (Page 5-38) yyShorten the processing time of the Color Area/ Area tool (Page 5-39) yyShorten the processing time of the position adjustment (Page 5-39) If the processing time is shortened, the stability of judgment may decrease. The processing time should therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining balance with the stability of the judgment process.
For the processing time

The processing time is the period of time from when an external or internal trigger is received until the status result is finalized. Processing time is displayed in the statistical information. Displaying the statistical information (Page 5-10)
5
Operating/Adjusting
Flow of the internal process

Trigger input
Imaging
(Tilt Correction) (Brightness Correction) (Position Adjustment) Tool 1 process Processing time
Tool 2 process
Tool n process
Status output
Methods to shorten the processing time are as follows. yyShortening the imaging processing time. yyShortening the processing time of each tool. yyDo not use correction functions (tilt correction, brightness correction, and position adjustment). yyDo not use the FTP client function. yyDo not use a field network.
5-37
Shortening the imaging processing time

Imaging Aarea zz
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the imaging area.
Entire imaging area (default value) Reduce the imaging area
Shortening the processing time of each tool

Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the settings for the search region, rotation range, and search algorithm.
5
Operating/Adjusting
Non-imaged area
Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging area from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. The processing time for capturing the image in nonimaged area can be shortened. The importing time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical direction (V). Imaging Area (Page 4-17)
Search region zz
Exposure time zz
The processing time can be shortened by shortening the exposure time (Page 4-11). The longer exposure time makes the processing time longer than the displayed exposure time. By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time can be shortened.
Rotation range zz
The searching time can be shortened by reducing the search region and setting the region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. Make sure that the range of position determining of the target does not exceed the search region. Setting a search region (Page 4-37) The target search time while rotating the master image can be shortened by reducing the rotation range (default value: 20). Make sure that the range of an installation angle of the target does not exceed the rotation range. Rotation Range (Page 4-39) Select [Hi speed]. This will decrease the judgment accuracy, but the processing time will be shorter. Search Algorithm (Page 4-40)
Search algorithm zz
Selecting the tool

The processing time of the Color Area/Area tool will be shorter than the Outline tool. Therefore, you should select the Color Area/Area tool whenever possible.
Producing an image with less unwanted zz outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target outlines. yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc. yySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. Setting a search region (Page 4-37)
5-38
Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool

The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the window shape settings.
Window shape
Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment

When the position adjustment is used, the processing time can be shortened by adjusting the search region or rotation range settings.
5
Operating/Adjusting
Window shape zz
If the current window shape is [Entire], reduce the window shape by modifying the setting to [Rect] or [Circle]. The processing time can be shortened by reducing the time required for the area processing. Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-44)
Search region zz
The searching time can be shortened by reducing the search region and setting the region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. Note that the range of the target position that the position adjustment function can correct becomes narrower. Setting a search region (Page 4-57)
Rotation range zz
The target search time while rotating the master image can be shortened by reducing the rotation range (default value: 20). Note that the range of the target angle that the position adjustment function can correct becomes narrower. Rotation Range (Page 4-59)
Producing an image with less unwanted zz outlines

The processing time becomes longer for images with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target outlines. yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making the target background plain, etc. yySet the search region so that non-target images containing unwanted outlines are not searched. Setting a search region (Page 4-57)
5-39
MEMO
5
Operating/Adjusting
5-40
6
Useful Features/ Various Functions
This chapter explains the useful features and operations of the sensor and IV-Navigator, the Program Details screen, the Sensor's internal image history screen, the I/O Settings screen, and the Advanced screen. Also, explains the operation of the menu bar.
List of the Useful Features................................6-2 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)..........................................6-6 Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG).............................6-15 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images........6-21 Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor...................6-26 Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor.........................................................6-30 Operating from the menu bar..........................6-45 Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter..................................6-51
6
Useful Features/Various Functions
6-1
List of the Useful Features

Useful features while running
Items Things you want to do Change over the program Useful functions Program function Description Up to 32 types (products) of products can be registered and loaded. A name can be assigned to the used program. Misoperation can be prevented by setting a password on the screen. A device name and a study name can be assigned to the sensor. Registers the master image from external input. The latest 100 images (in color) or 300 images (in monochrome) can be saved into the memory of the sensor and confirmed them. The image history can be confirmed by using a batch backup file (*.iva). The sensor images and the IV-Navigators screen can be saved by clicking the [Save Image] button. The statistical data of the processing times and results can be confirmed. The status result of each tool can be displayed in the histogram screen. Data of the images captured by the sensor and the status result information can be automatically transferred to an FTP server. Image data in IVP format individually saved in the image history or saved by FTP transfer can be converted to BMP format in batch. Reference page 6-6
Assign a name to the settings of each product for easy Program function identification Operation Prevent misoperation by the operator Assign a name to each sensor for easy identification Automatically register the master image Automatically save and confirm the NG images Confirm the image history in the sensor saved as a batch backup file (*.iva). Password Lock Device Name External master registration Sensors internal image history
6-12
6-34 6-31 6-26
6
Useful Features/Various Functions Analysis
6-2
6-15
Simulator
7-1
Save a sensor image displayed on the IV-Navigator into the PC Save Image Capture the IV-Navigators screen Check the operation status statistically Check the operation status with a histogram Automatically save data of the images captured by the sensor and the status result information outside the sensor Statistical process screen Histogram screen
6-22
5-10
5-12
FTP client function
6-36
Convert image files in IVP IVP-Converter format to BMP format in batch
6-51
Items
Things you want to do Zoom in/out the images
Useful functions Zoom In/Zoom Out button
Description The zoom ratio can be changed to 100%/125%/150%/ 200%/300%/500%. The language can be changed to Japanese, English, Deutsch, Chinese (Simplified), or Chinese (Traditional). The [Manual Trigger] button displayed when the external trigger is selected can be switched to show/hide. If the image does not need to be displayed, the screen update can become faster by setting to display the status result only.
Reference page 3-11
Change the display language Language Display Hide the trigger button Manual Trigger button
3-2 6-49
6-48
Make the screen update faster
Image while Running
6-48
6
Useful features during installation/adjustment

Items Things you want to do Stabilize the judgment. Judgment Shorten the process time process Issue an internal trigger and perform judgment process within the shortest cycle Adjust the threshold for the Threshold detection by using the saved images Prevent the internal lighting from blinking Correct the distorted images due to being taken from an angle Adjust the color tint (white balance) Correct the images of a target that are rotated 180 Inspection Tool Auto Tuning Lighting Mode (Continuous) Useful functions Description Adjusts the sensor installation and the settings navigator. Adjusts the settings navigator. Sets the trigger interval to 1ms. The threshold can be set automatically by selecting an image and specifying to OK or NG. The light can be set to stay lit at all times by synchronizing with the trigger. The distorted images due to the limitations for the sensor installation can be corrected and displayed correctly. The color tint can be adjusted and displayed correctly. The image of a target can be rotated 180 without adjusting the sensor's position. Reference page 5-29 5-37 8-3
5-15
4-19
Tilt Correction
6-40
Imaging
White Balance Image display direction
6-42 6-43
6-3
Items
Things you want to do
Useful functions
Description The settings can be confirmed or edited by using a batch backup files (*.iva). Read all the settings for the sensor and those can be saved into the PC. The batch backup data stored into the PC can be transferred to another sensor. The settings of a set program number which has been set can be copied to another program number. The settings for a specific set program number which have been saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) can be imported. The list of settings can be confirmed with Microsoft Excel etc. The settings can be initialized to the factory default. The version for the model or the operation software can be confirmed.
Reference page 7-1
Confirm/edit the settings without Simulator connecting to the sensor. Back up the settings to the PC Copy the settings to multiple sensors Batch Backup Transfer Program Settings
6-21
6-23
6
Useful Features/Various Functions Settings
6-12
Copy the settings and use the settings to set another product
Program function
6-13
Confirm the settings of the sensor with the list. Initialize the settings of the sensor Confirm the version of the sensor
Export Initialize Sensor Sensor Information
6-45 6-44 6-31 6-50
Confirm the version The version of the IV-Navigator Version information information of the IV-Navigator. can be confirmed.
6-4
Items
Things you want to do Confirm whether or not the input and output line are correctly wired
Useful functions I/O Monitor
Description The operation test for the input and output line can be performed. The polarity can be changed to NPN or PNP according to the control unit currently used. The settings for each OUT can be changed to N.O. or N.C. The output can be changed from level output to one-shot output. On-delay time can be set for the one-shot output. Rising trigger or falling trigger can be selected as the operation of the external trigger When the total status result of each detection tool was NG, the total status NG output function turns ON. When the sensor is running with no system error occurring, the output function turns ON. Logical operation result of each detection tool can be assigned to the output function. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK]/ [Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
Reference page 6-28
Switch to NPN output or PNP I/O Polarity output Switch the output to N.O. or N.C. Output the status output with one-shot Output the status output with on-delay Switch the external trigger to rise or fall Output format Output Type Common Output Settings Input Assignment
6-28 6-27 6-27 6-27 6-26
6
I/O line
Output the NG status results
Total status NG output
4-61
Confirm whether or not the sensor is running properly Form a logical operation of status result Change the total status conditions
RUN output
4-61
Logic output
4-64
Total status conditions
4-64
6-5
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Overview of the program functions
The sensor can save the judgment condition set in the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types (32 products). By reading the judgment condition which has been saved according to each product, changeover can be done easily. Sensor PROG31 : Product XX
Things can be performed with the program functions

yySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment conditions (programs). Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1) yyReads and operates the saved program. Using the program functions (changing over) (Page 6-9) yySelects the reading method of the program. Input Settings (Page 6-26) yyNames the judgment conditions (programs). Editing a program name (Page 6-12) yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs). Copying a program (Page 6-12) yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to the status before setting. Initializing a program (Page 6-14)
6
Useful Features/Various Functions *1 *2
6-6
PROG02 : Product C PROG01 : Product B PROG00 : Product A Settings Navigator *1 yyImaging settings yyMaster image *2 yyTool settings yyOutput Assignment Sensor Advanced yyEnvironmental yySetup Adjustment yySwitching programs The auto focus type includes the focusing position. Including the threshold of each tool.
Preparing the program functions

Registers the judgment condition for each product to the program before running.
Preparation procedures
1 Display the main screen in [Program].
Preparation flow
(1) Select a program number Select a program number to register a judgment condition from PROG00 to PROG31. (2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings Navigator Set the judgment condition for a product in the Settings Navigator. (3) Select a program switch method The switching method can be selected from the following items. yySwitching from the external input line. yySelecting the program from the main screen in [Run]. yyDisplaying the Program Details screen and selecting the program. yySwitching from a field network For the details of the procedure for switching IV Series from a field network, refer to Users Manual (Field Network). The following functions can be used with the preparations for the program function. yyThe product name can be registered to the program. Editing a program name (Page 6-12) yyTo register a similar product, the program can be copied, and then the settings can be edited. Copying a program (Page 6-12) yySettings can be changed after importing the program in the batch backup file. Importing a program (Page 6-13) yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition registered in the program to the status before setting. Initializing a program (Page 6-14)
2 Select a program number to register a

judgment condition of a product.
Select the program
6
The program can also be selected from the [Detail] button (Page 6-11).
3 Set a judgment condition in the Sensor

Setup screen.
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs

for the number of products that are to be changed over.
6-7
5 To switch the program by inputting a
signal from the PLC etc. to the input line of the sensor, place a check mark to the [Enable program switching through external input] check box and set the function of the input line.
Set the function of the input line
6
Useful Features/Various Functions Input Settings (Page 6-26) The bit to be set differs depending on the product numbers to be registered. Product numbers to be registered (Program numbers) 2 3 to 4 5 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 32 bit to be assigned to the input line bit0 bit0/bit1 bit0/bit1/bit2 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4
Setup example When 7 types of products are to be registered, bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned.
6-8
Using the program functions (changing over)

When switching the program in the main screen in [Run]
When switching the program in the Program Details screen
1 Start the run mode.
Starting an Operation (Page 5-2)
2 Display the Program Details screen.

[File] menu (Page 6-45)
Select a program that the product to be 2 Select a program number that the product 3 judged is registered, and click the [Change to be judged is registered. Program] button.
Select the program Select the program
6
The confirmation dialog appears. The program number can also be selected while confirming a master image with the [Detail] button (Page 6-11).
4 Start the run mode with the new program

number by clicking the [OK] button.
3 Start the run mode with the new program

number by clicking the [OK] button.
For details of switching from the dedicated monitor, refer to the IV Series User's Manual (Monitor).
6-9
When switching the program by the external input

of the input line.
2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is registered with the status
Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-26) to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number. Program number bit4 (MSB) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF bit3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON bit2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON bit1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON bit0 (LSB) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON : OFF : ON : OFF : Program number PROG16 PROG17 PROG18 PROG19 PROG20 PROG21 PROG22 PROG23 PROG24 PROG25 PROG26 PROG27 PROG28 PROG29 PROG30 PROG31 bit4 (MSB) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON bit3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON bit2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON bit1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON bit0 (LSB) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
6
PROG00 PROG01 PROG02 PROG03 PROG04 PROG05 PROG06 PROG07 PROG08 PROG09 PROG10 PROG11 PROG12 PROG13 PROG14 PROG15
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [NPN] yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [PNP]
The state shorted with 0 V line Open The state that voltage is applied Open
For details of the controlling method and the timing chart, refer to Changing Over (Page 8-7).
6-10
Displaying the Program Details screen

This section explains the Program Details screen displayed when the [Detail] button is clicked on the main screen of the IV-Navigator. When the Program Details screen opens by clicking the [Detail] button on the main screen in [Run], only the [Change Program] button can be clicked.
(3) [Initialize] button Initializes the set items in the program and resets to the default. Initializing a program (Page 6-14) (4) Thumbnail images Displays a program number, program name, and thumbnail image. (5) Program name Displays a program name of an magnified image. (6) [Edit] button Edits a program name of the selected program. Editing a program name (Page 6-12) (7) Tool list Displays a tool list which has been set in the selected program. Displays a frame of the tool window on the magnified image with a thick line by selecting the tool. Also, displays a frame of the search region in light blue. (8) Image display screen Magnifies the selected thumbnail image.
1 Display the main screen in [Run] or

[Program].
6
2 Click the [Detail] button.
The Program Details screen opens. The displayed items are as follows.
(1) (2) (3)
(9) [Change Program] button Switches a program to be used to the program of the selected thumbnail image. When switching the program in the Program Details screen (Page 6-9)
(6) (7)
(4) (5)
(10) [Close] button The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program].
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1) [Copy] button Copies a set program to another program number. Copying a program (Page 6-12) (2) [Import from File] button Imports a program from the batch backup file. Importing a program (Page 6-13)
6-11
Editing a program name

Edits the program name of the selected program.
Copying a program
Copies a set program to another program number. A new program can be created by reusing the settings which has been set.
1 Display the main screen in [Program]. 2 Display the Program Details screen.
Displaying the Program Details screen (Page 6-11)
6
3 Select the program to change the program

name and click the [Edit] button.
Select the program
3 Select the program to be copied and click

the [Copy] button.
Select the program
The screen to edit the program name opens.
4 Input any name and click the [OK] button.
4 Select the program of the copy destination

and click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Program details screen. If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, the program name might be replaced and displayed as hyphens (-).
Select the program
The copy source program is copied to the copy destination.
6-12
Importing a program
Imports one program from the batch backup file. A new program can be created by reusing the settings of the imported program.
6 From the program saved in the batch
backup file, select a program to be the importing source.
3 Select the program to be copied and click

the [Import from File] button
7 Select a program of the importing
destination and click the [OK] button.
6
The program of the import source will be imported to the importing destination.
4 Click the
button.
5 Select a batch backup file to be the
importing source of a program and click the [Open] button.
6-13
Initializing a program
Initializes settings in the program and resets to the default.
6
3 Select the program to be initialized and

click the [Initialize] button.
Select the program
The system returns to the Program details screen. The deleted program will be [No Master Image].
6-14
Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
Sensor's Internal Image History ( Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition, it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows. yyNG Only (default value)..... Saves the images whose total status result was NG. yyAll....................................... Saves all the images that were judged. Loads the saved images into the PC and the images can be used for confirming the causes and tendency of the NG result. The numbers of images can be saved are as follows. yyColor type.................... 100 images yyMonochrome type........ 300 images The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows. yyColor type.................... 70 images yyMonochrome type........ 210 images Since the memory of the sensors internal image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the power is turned OFF. To save an image, select the [File] [Batch Backup] from the menu bar, and then perform batch backup.
6
6-15
Displaying the Sensor's internal image history screen

This section explains how to display the Sensors internal image history screen. There are two methods for displaying the Sensors internal image history screen. [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is selected on the main screen in [Program].
Displaying from the main screen in [Run] Displaying from the main screen in
1 Click the [Image Hist] button in the main

screen in [Run].
[Program]
1 Click the [Image Hist] button in the main

screen in [Program].
6
The Logging pause confirmation screen opens. Select whether or not to pause. When the operation is not pausing yyThe added or overwritten history image will not be updated automatically. To update, click the [Refresh] button. yyWhen the history image is erased by overwriting and updating in the sensor during display on the monitor, it may not be displayed again on the monitor.
6-16
Loading and confirming the saved images

Display the image history saved in the built-in memory of the sensor. Use the simulator (Page 7-1) for confirmation of the image history saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).
1 Display the Sensors internal image history screen.

(1) (2)
Displaying the Sensors internal image history screen (Page 6-16)

(3) (4) (5)
(6) (7) (8) (11) (12) (9)
6
(10)
(13)
(1) Filter Select the image history type to be displayed from [All]/[NG Only]/[OK Only]. (2) [Save All Images] button Saves all the image histories saved in the sensor to the individual file (*.bmp and *.ivp) or batch backup file (*.iva). Saving all the image histories individually (Page 6-18) Backing up the image history in a batch (Page 6-19) To back up the images in a batch from the View screen, the saving target will be [Prog.+Image Hist.]. (3) [Refresh] button Displayed if the [Continue Logging] is selected when the image history is to be displayed from the main screen in [Run]. Clears the image history displayed on the IVNavigator, and then acquires and displays the latest image history in the sensor.
(4) [Delete All] button Clears the image histories saved in the sensor. Clearing the saved images (Page 6-19) (5) [Logging Settings] button Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for the image history. Changing the logging conditions of the image history (Page 6-20) (6) Thumbnail images Displays the number of triggers, total status result, and thumbnail image. For details of the number of triggers, refer to Displaying the statistical information (Page 5-10).
6-17
(7) Trigger number Displays the number of triggers of the magnified history image. In the following cases, characters of the trigger number are displayed in gray. yyImages which the tool settings was changed after image history saving yyWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been performed Moreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] / [Process] is selected for Tool View (Page 5-7), only the tool window is displayed and the process contents are not displayed.
Saving all the image histories individually

Saves all the image histories saved in the sensor to the individual file (*.bmp and *.ivp).
1 Display the Sensors internal image

history screen.
2 Click the [Save All Images] button and select
the [Save all images one by one (*.bmp,*ivp)].
6
(8) Total status result Displays the total status result of the magnified history image in OK or NG. (9) Magnified display screen Magnifies the selected thumbnail image. Basic Operation for Tools (Page 3-11) (10) Program number Displays a program number of the Sensor's internal image history currently displayed. (11) [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button Performs a Tool Auto Tuning based on the magnified history image. Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15) (12) Tool list Displays a tool list which has been set in the program of the history image. The tool will be displayed on the image according to the settings of the tool display (Page 5-7) by selecting the tool. (13) [Close] button The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program]. The Browse For Folder screen opens.
3 Specify an arbitrary saving destination

The save completion message appears. Saves all files at the same time. To save individually, save it with the [Save Image] button of the image tool bar (Page 3-11).
The system returns to the Sensor's internal image history screen.

6-18
Backing up the image history in a batch

Saves all the image histories saved in the sensor to the batch backup file (*.iva).
Clearing the saved images

Clears the image histories saved in the sensor.
1 2
Display the Sensors internal image history screen.


history screen.
Click the [Save All Images] button and select the [Batch Backup (*.iva)].
2 Click the [Delete All] button.
6
Useful Features/Various Functions The confirmation dialog appears. The Batch Backup screen opens.
3 Click the [Go] button.
The image history will be cleared.
4 Click the [Close] button.
The save as screen opens.
4 Click the [Save] button.

The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program].
Change a saving destination of the file and file name as needed. The backup completion message appears.

6-19
Changing the logging conditions of the image history

Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for the image history.

history screen.
Display the Sensor's internal image history screen from the main screen in [Program]. [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is selected on the main screen in [Program]. Displaying the Sensors internal image history screen (Page 6-16)
6
2 Click the [Logging Settings] button.
3 Select a logging condition.
Saves all the images to the yyAll...................... image history regardless of the status result. y Only saves the images whose NG Only............ y status result is NG to the image history.
6-20
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images

Backs up the data saved in the sensor, transfers the setting data, and captures an image.
4 Click the [Go] button.

yyTo back up all the images of the image history in addition to the sensor settings (Sensor Setup (Settings Navigator) and extended functions of all programs), place a check mark to the [Save Image History] check box. yyWhen the image history has been saved in [Run], the image being the saving object may be updated and deleted during the batch backup. A deleted image is not saved. Because of this, saving in [Program] is recommended.
Saving the sensor settings or the image history

Backing up in a batch
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch. When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings can be copied based on the batch backup data. yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup of the data saved in the sensor in case of malfunction of the product. yyThe saving time increases when this is performed in [Program]. Execution while in the [Run] status is recommended.
6
Useful Features/Various Functions The save as screen opens.

[Program].
2 Click the [Advanced] button.
Change a saving destination of the file and file name as needed.
3 Select the [Backup] tab and click the

[Batch Backup] button.
[Backup] tab
The backup completion message appears.
The Batch Backup screen opens.
6-21
Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually

In the screen which displays the [Save Image] button, an image displayed on the IV-Navigator can be individually saved to the PC. The ivp format file which can be used for a master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning will also be saved at the same time. The IV-Navigators screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot). The screens which displays the [Save Image] button are as follows. yyMain screen in [Run] yyMain screen in [Program] yySettings Navigator yyLimit Adjustment yyInspection Tool Auto Tuning yyProgram Details yySensors internal image history This section explains the procedure for saving images by using an example of the main screen in [Run].
Confirming the saving destination of an image
1 Click the [Show saved image file location] button.
6
The folder which has been set to the saving destination opens.
Changing the saving destination of an image
Saving procedure
1 Click the [] button and select the
1 Click the [Save Image] button.
[Change saved image file location].
The Browse For Folder screen opens. The [Image saved] message appears, and the bmp and ivp format files will be saved to the saving destination.
2 Specify an arbitrary saving destination

6-22
Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor

Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor. yyOperations cannot be cancelled during transmission of the settings data. yyIt is recommended to batch back up the data saved in the sensor beforehand. Saving the sensor settings or the image history (Page 6-21) yyThe image data in the image history will not be transferred. yyThe settings file of a different model of the sensor cannot be transferred. yyThe settings data of auto focus type and manual focus type can be transferred mutually. However, when the setting data of a manual focus type are transferred to an auto focus type, the focusing position will be converted to the default value. yyWhen directly connecting the sensor to the PC, the setting file of the sensor with the FTP client function or a field network enabled cannot be transferred. yyWhen the FTP client function or field network function is enabled, the setting data cannot be transferred to the sensor during running.
3 Select the [Backup] tab and click the

[Transfer Program Settings] button.
[Backup] tab
The screen to select the batch backup file opens.
5 Select a batch backup file to be
6
transferred, and click the [Open] button.
The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.

[Program].
6-23
6 Confirm the information of the setting
file to be transferred and click the [Send] button.
The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen. When a file was transferred while the [Send the settings below.] check box of the Setting Transfer Options is checked , the connection with the sensor is terminated and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen.
6
After transferring files have been completed, the transfer completion message appears. yyIf you would like to transfer the I/O polarity (NPN/PNP) and the network settings also, check the [Send the settings below.] check box of the Setting Transfer Options.
When the [Send the settings below.] check box is checked, pay attention to the following items. yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [Enable], the image history will be cleared. yyThe number of images which can be saved to the image history when using the FTP client function are as follows. - Color type.....................70 images - Monochrome type.........210 images yyWhen a file transfer is completed, the connection with the sensor is terminated and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen. yyWhen the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts. yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts.
6-24
Folder composition and file naming rules

Data type Storage Rule The arbitrary folder can be specified. The default value of the storage folder is as follows. Storage folder For Windows 7 C:\Users\(Login user name)\ Documents\IV-Navigator For Windows XP C:\Documents and Settings\ (Login user name)\My Documents\ IV-Navigator YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1, *2 iva Saves the bmp format file of the taken image For Windows 7 and the ivp format file C:\Users\(Login user name)\ which can be used Documents\IV-Navigator\Image for a master image For Windows XP registration or Tool C:\Documents and Settings\(Login user Auto Tuning at the name)\My Documents\IV-Navigator\ same time. Image The IV-Navigators YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1, *3 screen will also be YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_screen*1, *4 saved at the same time (screenshot). bmp ivp An arbitrary folder can be specified. The default value of the storage folder is as follows. IV Series Auto Tuning registration data file Storage folder For Windows 7 C:\Users\(Login user name)\ Documents\IV-Navigator For Windows XP C:\Documents and Settings\ (Login user name)\My Documents\ IV-Navigator PROG** (** indicates the program number) ivm An arbitrary folder can be specified. The default value of the storage folder is as follows. Description Reference page
Batch Backup
Saves all the settings in the sensor in a batch. All the images of the image history can also be saved with settings.
6-21
File name Extension
6
Storage folder Save Image
6-22
File name Extension
Saves all the images registered in the Tool Auto Tuning.
5-27
File name Extension *1 *2 *3 *4
YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day, hh : Hour, mm : Minute, ss : Second Changes to the arbitrary file name and saves it. Taken image file. Saved in bmp format and ivp format. Screenshot file of the IV-Navigator. Saved in bmp format.
6-25
Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor

This section explains the I/O Settings screen displayed when the [I/O Settings] button on the main screen is clicked. Only when the [I/O Settings] button is clicked in the main screen in [Program], settings for inputting and outputting of the sensor can be changed.
Input Assignment zz
IN1 Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for IN1 input line. yyExt. Trigger Rising Sets the trigger input to the rising edge of the external trigger. yyExt. Trigger Falling Sets the trigger input to the falling edge of the external trigger. IN2 to IN6 Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6. yyOFF Ignores the input. yyProgram bit0 to bit4 Specifies the number for switching the programs. Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) (Page 6-6) yyClear Error Sets the error output clearance.
Input Settings
Sets the input settings for the sensor.
6
1 Click the [I/O Settings] button in the main

The I/O Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [Input] tab and set the input

settings of the sensor.
Option zz
yyExt. Master Save Sets the master image registration from the external input.
Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save If the check box is checked , the system writes the data to the ROM of the sensor when the master registration is performed with the external input or the field network. Registering the Master Image (Page 8-8) Enable program switching through external input If the check box is checked , the program number can be switched with the external input. Preparing the program functions (Page 6-7) To switch the program number with the external input, any of the program bit0 to bit4 must be assigned to any of the IN2 to IN6 of the [Input Assignment].

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
6-26
Output Settings
Sets the output settings for the sensor.
Output Type zz
Select an output mode. Changing the timing of the status output (Page 8-6) [Latching] Outputs the result along with the judgment condition of the sensor.

The I/O Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [Output] tab and set the output

settings of the sensor.
[One-Shot] Sets the One-Shot ON Time and ON-Delay Time in which output the status output with one-shot.
6
yyOne-Shot ON Time Specifies the flash width of the one-shot within 1 to 1000 ms. yyON-Delay Time Specify the ON-Delay Time of the one-shot flash within 0 to 5000 ms.

Output Type zz
OUT1 to OUT4 Specifies the output format of the output line with [N.O] or [N.C].
[OK] button.
6-27
I/O Monitor
Whether or not the I/O line for control is correctly wired can be confirmed.
I/O Polarity
Switches the polarity of the sensor.
Click the [I/O Settings] button in the main screen in [Program].

6
The I/O Settings screen opens. The I/O Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [I/O Monitor] tab and set the

output settings of the sensor.
2 Click the [I/O Polarity] button.
The Polarity screen opens.
3 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity.

Input Monitor zz
Displays the input status of external input in real time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output from the PLC is being correctly input can be confirmed.
Output Test zz
Click the [ON] button to turn ON each OUT output. Click the [OFF] button to turn them OFF. Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is correctly output.

[OK] button.
yyNPN Output circuit.....NPN open collector Input circuit........No-voltage input yyPNP Output circuit.....PNP open collector Input circuit........Voltage input Cables (Page 2-8)
6-28
If the polarity is switched, the confirmation dialog appears.
5 Click the [Yes] button. 6 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the I/O Settings screen.
6
6-29
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor

Advanced settings for the sensor
This section explains the Advanced Sensor Settings screen displayed when the [Advanced] button on the main screen is clicked.
[Environmental] tab
Device Settings zz
Sets the sensor name and changes the network settings. Environmental (Page 6-31)
Field Network zz
Sets the field network settings. Field Network (Page 6-33)
Security zz
6
Useful Features/Various Functions Only when the [Advanced] button is clicked in the main screen in [Program], the advanced settings of the sensor can be changed.
6-30
Sets the password lock setting. Security (Page 6-34)
Auto Focus Adjustment Position zz

Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position for auto focus common to all programs. Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only) (Page 6-35)
[FTP] tab
Automatically transfers the image data and status result information saved in the sensor memory to an FTP server. FTP (Page 6-36)
[Setup Adjustment] tab

Tilt Correction zz
Performs a tilt correction of the images displayed on the screen. Tilt Correction (Page 6-40)
White Balance (for color type only) zz

Adjusts the white balance of the image displayed on the screen. White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-42)
Image Display Direction zz

Rotates the image displayed on the screen 180. Image display direction (Page 6-43)
[Backup] tab
Batch Backup zz
Saves the settings data or image history saved in the sensor to the PC. Batch Backup (Page 6-44)
Environmental
Sets a sensor name and changes the network settings.
Setting a device name
Transfer Program Settings zz

Transfers the settings data saved in the PC to the sensor. Transfer Program Settings (Page 6-44)
1 Display the Advanced Sensor Settings

screen.
Advanced settings for the sensor (Page 6-30)
[Initialize/Update] tab
Initialize Sensor zz
Initializes the sensor settings. Initialize Sensor (Page 6-44)
2 Select the [Environmental] tab. 3 Set the environment settings of the

sensor.
6
Update Sensor zz
Updates the operation software of the sensor. Update Sensor (Page 6-44)
Device Name zz
Displays the sensor name. To change the sensor name, click the [Change Device Name] button and input an arbitrary name in the Device Name screen. The sensor can be arbitrary named and controlled. Input an arbitrary name. yyIf the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, the program name might be replaced and displayed as hyphens (-). yyTo use the PROFINET function, use only a-z, 0-9, -, and .. For the setting details, refer to IV Series Users Manual (Field Network). yyWhen you changed the device name while the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.
[Sensor Information] tab

Displays the information set in the sensor. The model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name can be confirmed.
MAC Address zz
Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The MAC address cannot be changed.

[OK] button.
6-31
Changing the network settings

yyThe settings are not required for the direct connection. yyHow to use the network setting yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to the network can be changed. yyThe network settings of the sensor can be initialized. The settings can also be initialized using the IP reset switch (Page A-35) of the sensor. yyTo set the IP address before connecting to the network, it can be set by connecting the PC and sensor directly. yyWhen you changed the device name while the PROFINET communication is being used, the sensor restarts.
[Reset] button zz
Clicking the [Reset] button resets the IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Port Number. Empty will be displayed after the reset.
6
By clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation dialog appears.
1 Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings

screen.
By clicking the [Yes] button, the network settings will be reset and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen.
2 Select the [Environmental] tab and click

[Change Network Settings] button.

[OK] button.
Network Settings screen opens.
3 Sets the network address of the sensor.
IP address/Subnet mask/Default gateway/ zz Port number

Displays the address for each network and port number. Set the desired address and port number, and click the [OK] button.
6-32
Field Network
Communicates with a PLC via a field network and the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as communication data. For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be selected.
Host device such as PLC (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET master unit)
6
Useful Features/Various Functions Sensor EtherNet/IP, PROFINET adapter
yyTo use the field network function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor. During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected. yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts. IV Series Users Manual (Field Network). yyFor the details of the field network function, refer to

screen.
3 Set field network settings.

the [Settings] button.
Protocol zz
Select a protocol for the field network. The Field Network setting screen opens.
Handshake Control zz
To enable the handshake control, check this check box . When the protocol is set as [Disable], this setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.

[OK] button.
6-33
Security
Sets the password to the sensor to prevent the incorrect operation.
Setting the password lock

screen.
Enable the password lock zz

Open the main screen in [Run]. The Lock Enabled message appears in the lower right of the screen.
2 Select the [Environmental] tab. 3 Place a check mark to the [Password

Lock] check box.
6
In the main screen in [Run], the following operation can be locked. yyTransition to the main screen in [Program] yyProgram switching yy[Manual Trigger] yyReset statistics yyLogging stop at the time of image history display yyClearing the image history yyTransfer Program Settings If the lock is canceled, the operation will be locked again by performing Click the status bar or Passage of 60 sec without performing any of the above locked operations.
4 Input an arbitrary password into the
[Password] and [Enter password for confirmation].
Disable the password lock zz

Input the password when the input dialog for the password to disable appears.
The Lock Disabled message appears in the lower right of the screen.
If you cancel the password lock and go to the main screen in [Program], the password lock will be canceled until you go to the main screen in [Run].
yyDefault: None (blank) yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the setting returns to the state before setting the new password.

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program]. To disable the password lock, remove the check mark from the [Password Lock] check box by step 3.
6-34
Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only)

Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position for the auto focus common to all programs.

screen.
When the auto focus adjustment position is set to [Common], a message recommending re-registration of the master image appears. Re-register the master image after the setting is completed. 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
2 Select the [Environmental] tab. 3 Set the auto focus adjustment position.

[OK] button.
6
Individual zz
Sets the focus adjustment position in each program. Select this when the focus position is different for each target registered in each program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when the program number is switched. Switching programs takes longer in this option due to the time needed to adjust the focusing position.
Common zz
Sets the focus adjustment position common to all programs. Select this when the focus position of the target registered in each program is common. The program can be quickly switched because re-adjustment of the focusing position will not be performed when the program number is switched. The duration for the operation count of the focusing function (program switch count) is 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to be changed in each program, set [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] to [Common] to extend its duration.
6-35
FTP
Automatically transfers the image data and status result information saved in the sensor memory to an FTP server.
Data transfer via FTP LAN
4 Set the network address of the FTP server.
IP Address zz
FTP client FTP server
6
Displays the IP address of the FTP server. Set an arbitrary address.
Port Number zz
Displays the port number. Set an arbitrary port number.
yyTo use the FTP client function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor. During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected. yyIf data are not transferred properly with the FTP Remedy when data client function, refer to transfer via FTP is unavailable (Page A-33).
User Name zz
Input the user name for logging in to the FTP server. Set an arbitrary user name. Default: None (blank)

screen.
Password zz
Input the password for logging in to the FTP server. Set an arbitrary password. Default: None (blank)
2 Select the [FTP] tab and enable the FTP

client setting.
Passive Mode zz
To use the passive mode, select [Enable]. yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [Enable], the image history will be cleared. yyThe number of images which can be saved to the image history when using the FTP client function are as follows. yyColor type................. 70 images yyMonochrome type..... 210 images
3 Click the [FTP Destination] button.

The FTP Destination Settings screen opens.
6-36
5 Click the [Connection Test] button to
test the connection with the connection destination.

The connection test is performed and the result window opens.
Transfer Condition zz
Selects the transfer condition of image data. Transfers all the images that yyAll...................... are judged. Transfers all the images whose yyNG Only............ total status results are NG. yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All], adjust the processing time so that all the images can be transferred. yyWhen the transfer could not be done on time, the data are saved in the internal buffer. The internal buffer can save images up to 30 images. yyImage data are transferred in the sequence that they have been saved to the internal buffer. yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and the image data transfer fails. yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All], confirm that there is sufficient storage area on the FTP server.
If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the setting is completed. When the test is executed, the connection with the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer destination, and data file creating are tested. When the connection cannot be done properly, deal with the problem in accordance with the cause of connect failure displayed on the result window. Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable (Page A-33)
6
File Format zz
Selects the file saving format for image data. yyIVP Transfers the image data as the format which can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation results can be confirmed in the simulator function by using the transferred image data. Moreover, the image data can be converted to the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter. yyBMP Transfers the image data as the format which can be opened by other applications. To transfer judgement results simultaneously with the image data, select [Enable]. Judgement results are transferred as a tab delimited text. The example for displaying the saved results file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.
7 Set the file transfer conditions.
Transfer Judgment Results zz
6-37
FTP Error zz
To turn ON the error output function for when a file transfer failed, select [Enable]. When this item is set to [Enable], the followings occur if a file transfer fails. yyThe following error messages are displayed in response to the causes of failure. - FTP Connection Error - FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed) - FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer) Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable (Page A-33) yyThe error output function turns ON. yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red. yyIf FTP Transfer Error has occurred while the sensor is running, the error condition will continue until the error is cleared.
Folder zz
Specifies the transfer destination folder of FTP server. Set an arbitrary folder name. yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to be transferred to the root folder. yyTo specify a subfolder, break it with "/" (onebyte slash). yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new folder will be created. Default: None (blank). Up to 16 characters can be set. yy/ (one-byte slash), . (one-byte point) and (one-byte space) cannot be used as the first nor last letter of the folder name. yy/ (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple times in a row.
6
8 Specify the transfer destination folder of

FTP server.
6-38
File Name zz
Sets the file name of the transfer files. yyDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters can be set. yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows. xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD The file name which has been yyxxxxxx....... set (up to 16 characters) A sequence number for each yyAAAAA...... FTP transfer (5 digits which zero suppression is used). Promptly after startup, 00000 is displayed. The program number (2 digits yyBB............. which zero suppression is used) The total status result (OK yyCC............. or NG) The extension (ivp or bmp) yyDDD.......... yyIf there is a file with the same name at the transfer destination, that file will be overwritten. When you transfer image data from multiple IV series, specify different transfer destinations so that the image data are not overwritten accidentally. yyIf the transfer destination folder is read only or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the image data transfer will fail.
Create Subfolder zz
To create subfolders under the transfer destination folder, select [Enable]. yyThe subfolder naming rule is as follows. IVxxxxx (xxxxx is a sequence number created every time the sensor is restarted or the FTP settings are changed.) yyWhen subfolders were created, the folder structure is as follows.
Root folder Transfer destination folder Subfolder 0000 0001 0002
6
When the file index quantity reaches the index upper limit, the folder of the next sequence number is created. yyThe default of subfolders is IV00001. yyThe upper limit is IV99999. When the upper limit has been reached, the count continues by returning to IV00000. yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized. yyThe upper limit of the count number of folders in the subfolder is 9999. When the number is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.
Index Upper Limit zz

Sets the upper limit of the number of image data which can be transferred to the transfer destination folder. When the file index quantity has reached the index upper limit, as follows. yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON], the folder of the next sequence number is created. yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF], the file index quantity returns to 0.

[OK] button.
The system returns tothe main screen in [Program].
6-39
Tilt Correction
If the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor and target and/or to prevent a shine on the targets surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally distorted. The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion. Vertical correction
Indicator light
Horizontal correction
6
Top view
Target
Top view
Target Indicator light
Target
Target
Lateral view
Lateral view
After tilt correction (vertical)
After tilt correction (horizontal)
6-40
1 Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings

screen.
Vertical zz
Performs a tilt correction in the vertical direction. Slide the slider to correct the display of the vertical direction of the taken image.
2 Select the [Setup Adjustment] tab. 3 Place a check mark to the [Enable Tilt
Correction] check box and click the [Set] button.
Before correction
After correction
Before correction
<Image of vertical correction>
Horizontal zz
The Tilt Correction screen opens. Performs a tilt correction in the horizontal direction. Slide the slider to correct display of the horizontal direction of the taken image.
Image a target to be a reference such as a piece of paper printed with square grids.
Before correction After correction Before correction
6
<Image of horizontal correction>
5 Perform the tilt correction.
yyIf the quality of the displayed taken image is poor, click the [Image Settings] tab to adjust the taken image. The following adjustments can be made. Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13) Lighting (Page 4-19) yyMake sure the target fits within the imaging area after tilt correction. The imaging area after the tilt correction may have become narrower than before the correction by the tilt correction.

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program]. Re-register the master image if the tilt correction is performed. 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
6-41
White Balance (for color type only)

Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in camera of the sensor. The white balance is adjusted by default.
4 Image a white-colored target and click the

[Go] button.

screen.
6
2 Select the [Setup Adjustment] tab. 3 Place a check mark to the [Enable White
Balance Adjustment] check box and click the [Set] button.
After the white balance adjustment is completed, the message White balance adjustment has been completed. appears.
5 Click the [OK] button. 6 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the White balance window.
The White Balance screen opens. If the displayed taken image is not suitable for adjusting the white balance, click the [Image Settings] tab to adjust the taken image. Also, if the white balance has been set to [Enable], the image will be displayed with the white balance adjustment applied. The following adjustments can be performed. Adjustment (Page 4-11) yy Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-13) yy Focus (Page 4-19) yy Lighting
After performing a white balance adjustment, a message prompting you to re-register the master image appears. Re-register the master image after the setting is completed. 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20) The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.
6-42
Image display direction

The target to be displayed on the screen may be rotated 180 and displayed due to the installation restrictions of the sensor and target. Change the display direction of an image and the image rotated 180 can be displayed.

screen.
2 Select the [Setup Adjustment] tab. 3 Select [Rotate 180].
Indicator light
6

yyAfter performing a rotate 180 correction, a message prompting you to re-register the master image appears. Re-register the master image after the setting is completed. 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20) yyIf a tilt correction (Page 6-40) has also been performed, confirm the tilt correction settings after a rotate 180 correction. The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.
Target
Before rotating 180
After rotating 180
6-43
Batch Backup
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch. When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings can be copied based on the batch backup data. For details of procedures, refer to Backing up in a batch (Page 6-21).
Transfer Program Settings
6
Transfers the settings data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor. Transferring For details of procedures, refer to the backed up settings to the sensor (Page 6-23).
Initialize Sensor
Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets to the factory default. For details of procedures, refer to Initializing the sensor (Page 3-10). The following settings will not be initialized. yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28) yyNetwork Settings (Page 6-32)
Update Sensor
Updates the operation software of the sensor. For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage. URL : http://www.keyence.com/
Sensor Information
Displays the information set in the sensor. The model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name can be confirmed.
6-44
Operating from the menu bar

[File] menu
Batch Backup
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch. For details of procedures, refer to Backing up in a batch (Page 6-21).
The system returns to the main screen in [Run]. The example for displaying the saved Program settings list file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

Transfers the settings data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor. For details of procedures, refer to Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor (Page 6-23).
6
Export
Program Settings List
Outputs the information set in the sensor in the Tab delimited text.
Statistics/Histogram Data
Outputs the statistical information and histogram information in the tab-delimited text.
1 Select [File] [Export] [Statistics/

Histogram Data] from the menu bar.
The Statistics/Histogram Data screen opens.
1 Display the main screen in [Program]. 2 Select [File] [Export] [Program

Settings List] from the menu bar.
The Program Settings List screen opens.

Change the saving destination of the file and file name as needed. The save completion message appears.
6-45
[View] menu
Statistics
Switches the statistical information to show/hide. For details of procedures, refer to Displaying the statistical information (Page 5-10) .
The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or [Program]. The example for displaying the saved Statistics/histogram data file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.
Tool Data
Switches the tool data to show/hide. For details of procedures, refer to Displaying the tool information (Page 5-12) .
6
Exit
Exits the IV-Navigator.
1 Select [File] [Exit] from the menu bar.

The IV-Navigator exits.
6-46
[Sensor] menu
Disconnect
Disconnects the connection between the sensor and PC, and displays the connection menu screen.
[Image] menu
Zoom
Zoom Out
Reduces the image displayed on the IV-Navigator. Select [Image] [Zoom] [Enlarge(Zoom Out)] from the menu bar. The image will be reduced per selecting. Minimum of 100% can be reduced.
1 Select [Sensor] [Disconnect] from the

menu bar.
The system returns to the Activation Menu screen.
Zoom In
Magnifies the image displayed on the IV-Navigator. Select [Image] [Zoom] [Enlarge(Zoom In)] from the menu bar. The image will be magnified per selecting. Up to 500% can be magnified.
6
Reset Statistics
Resets the statistical information and histograms.
1 Display the main screen in [Run]. 2 Select [Sensor] [Reset Statistics] from
the menu bar.
Fit to Window
Fits the image displayed on the IV-Navigator to the screen size and displays it. Select [Image] [Zoom] [Fit to Window] from the menu bar.

Initialize Sensor
Tool Display Options

Switches the display method of the tool. Select [Image] [Tool Display Options] from the menu bar and select an arbitrary display method. Selectable display methods are as follows.
The statistical information and histograms will be reset.
Initializes the information set in the sensor and set to the factory default. For details of procedures, refer to Initializing the sensor (Page 3-10).
For color type zz

Off/Window/Process 1/Process 2

Off/Window/Process/Process 1/Process 2 For details of each display method, refer to Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) .
Sensor Update
Updates the operation software of the sensor. For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage. URL : http://www.keyence.com/
6-47
Manual Trigger
Issues a trigger one time in each time selecting [Image] [Manual Trigger] from the menu bar. This button is used when the external trigger cannot be input. Enabled only when the external trigger is being set.
[Setting] menu
Manual trigger button
When an external trigger is being set, select it to show/hide the [Manual Trigger] button. Select [Setting] [Manual Trigger Button] from the menu bar and select the [Show]/[Hide]. When an internal trigger is being set, the Manual trigger button will not be displayed.
Capture
Save Image
Saves the bmp format file of the taken image and the ivp format file which can be used for a master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning at the same time. The IV-Navigators screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot). Select [Image] [Capture] [Save Image] from the menu bar.
6
Image while Running

Select it to show/hide the [Image while Running]. If it is set to hide, you can stop updating images and update the status result faster. Select [Setting] [Image while Running] from the menu bar and select the [Show]/[Hide].
Show saved image file location

Opens the saving destination folder of the captured image. Select [Image] [Capture] [Show saved image file location] from the menu bar.
Change saved image file location

Opens the reference screen of a folder and changes a saving destination of the captured image.
1 Select [Image] [Capture] [Change
saved image file location] from the menu bar. an arbitrary folder and click the [OK] button.
2 In the reference screen of a folder, select
6-48
Language
Switches the display language of the IV-Navigator. Selectable languages are as follows. Japanese / English / German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean
[Window] menu
Program Details
Displays the Program Details screen. Select [Window] [Program Details] from the menu bar. For details of the Program Details screen, refer to Things can be performed with the program functions (Page 6-6).
1 Select [Setting] [Language] from

the menu bar and select an arbitrary language.
Sensors Internal Image History

Displays the Sensors internal Image history screen. Select [Window] [Sensors Internal Image History] from the menu bar. For details of the Sensor's internal image history screen, refer to Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15).
6
2 Click the [OK] button. 3 Exits the IV-Navigator.

Exit (Page 6-46)
4 Start the IV-Navigator again.
I/O Settings
Displays the I/O Settings screen. Select [Window] [I/O Settings] from the menu bar. For details of the I/O Settings screen, refer to Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor (Page 6-26).
The display language of the IV-Navigator will be switched to the language selected in step 1.
Regarding the display of the characters in device names (Page 6-31) and program names (Page 6-11) yyCharacters which cannot be display with the language after change are replaced and displayed as hyphens (-). yyIf the device or program name has not been changed after the language change, it will be displayed as they were when the language is changed back. yyIf the device or program name has been changed after the language change, it will remain replaced by hyphens (-) and the former information will be erased when the language is changed back.

Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen. Select [Window] [Advanced Sensor Settings] from the menu bar. For details of the Advanced Sensor Settings screen, Setting the Advanced Information of the refer to Sensor (Page 6-30).
6-49
[Help] menu
User's Manual
Opens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the selected language. Select [Help] [User's Manual] from the menu bar. yyThe User's Manual (PDF format) can also be opened by pressing the <F1> key. yyWhen the [Help] menu does not exit on the menu bar such as in the Program Details screen, Sensor Setup screen (Settings Navigator), etc, open the User's Manual by pressing the <F1> key.
6
Version information
Displays the version information of the IV-Navigator. Select [Help] [About] from the menu bar.
6-50
Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter

IVP-Converter is a software for transferring image data in IVP format, which have been saved individually in the image history or saved by the FTP client function, to BMP format. The files operating method is generally the same as the explorer operating method in the Windows standard.
Installing the IVP-Converter

When you install the IV-Navigator on the PC, the OVP-Converter is installed simultaneously. Therefore, there is no need to install the IVPConverter separately. yyFor the details of the IV-Navigator installing Installing the IVprocedure, refer to Navigator (IV-H1) (Page 2-14). yyWhen you install the IV-Navigator, The shortcut icon of the IVP-Converter is also created on the PC desktop.
Starting up the IVP-Converter
1 Double-click the [IVP-Converter] icon on

the desktop.
The IVP-Converter starts.
6
Main screen of the IVP Converter

This section explains the main screen of the IVP-Converter.
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Conversion source folder Specifies the folder where the IVP data you would like to convert are to be stored. (2) [...] button Opens the folder to specify the conversion source folder. (3) [Convert] button Converts all of the IVP data that are stored in the folder specified at the Conversion source folder and its subfolders to BMP data.
(4) [About] button Displays the About IVP-Converter screen. (5) [Language] button Displays the language selecting screen. You can select an arbitrary language to switch the display language. (6) [Close] button Exits the IVP-Convertor.
6-51
Converting IVP data to BMP data

Saves IVP data as BMP data, which can be opened in other applications.
1 Click the [...] button and specify the folder

where the IVP data you would like to convert are to be stored.
yyThe BMP data are saved in the same folder as the pre-converted IVP. yyDuring the conversion, the following screen is displayed and the total amount of IVP data and conversion progress can be confirmed.
6
yyIf there are BMP data with the same names, they will be over written. yyUp to 100,000 files of IVP data can be converted at a time.
All of the IVP data that are stored in the specified folder and its subfolders are the conversion targets.
2 Click the [Convert] button to execute the

BMP conversion.
BMP data are saved in the conversion source folder.
6-52
7
Simulator
This chapter explains the functions and operations of the Simulator.
Simulator.............................................................7-2 Basic Operation of Simulator............................7-3 Names and Functions of the Screen................7-6 Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation).................................7-8 IV Sensor Simulation.......................................7-14 Operating from the menu bar..........................7-18
7
Simulator
- IV Series Users Manual (PC Software) -
7-1
Simulator
Simulator
Simulator is the function for checking/changing the program settings with IV-Navigator without a connected sensor, based on the batch backup file (*.iva), and for performing an IV Sensor Simulation based on the history images. It is also possible to transfer the data to the sensor and to perform operation again after changing the setting data with the Simulator.
(1) Operate by using the sensor (Save the image history) Saves the batch backup file (2) (*.iva) from the sensor Transfers the batch backup (5) file (*.iva) to the sensor
7
(3) Setting changes Simulator (4) Confirm the operation status
Simulator
7-2
Three main operations which can be performed with the Simulator function are as follows.
Sensor Setup Simulation

With no sensor connected, it is possible to edit and save the tool settings etc. based on the program settings saved in the batch backup file (*.iva). The screen to be displayed is the same as in the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup). However, some functions which cannot be used by Simulator are being hidden.
IV Sensor Simulation
With no sensor connected, it is possible to check the actual operation result based on the image history and the program saved in the batch backup file (*.iva). It is also possible to adjust the tool settings by changing the tool thresholds during simulation.
Confirming the image history

The images in the image history saved as the batch backup file (*.iva) can be confirmed.
Basic Operation of Simulator
Basic Operation of Simulator

Operation flow of the Simulator
Saving the batch backup file (*.iva) Save the settings and the sensor image history from the operating sensor. Saving the batch backup file (Page 7-3)
Saving the batch backup file
1 If you wish to perform the IV Sensor
Simulation, save the sensors internal image history into the memory of the sensor.
Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15)
Starting the Simulator Open the batch backup file (*.iva) and start the Simulator. Starting the Simulator (Page 7-4)
2 Save the batch backup file (*.iva) to be

read to the Simulator from the sensor.
The saved settings are used for the Sensor Setup Simulation. For use of the IV Sensor Simulation, also save the image history. Backing up in a batch (Page 6-21)
7
Simulator
Sensor Setup Simulation Check/Change the settings. Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation) (Page 7-8)
The batch backup file (*.iva) can be saved by using the monitor (IV-M30). For details, refer to the IV Series Users Manual (Monitor).
IV Sensor Simulation Check the operation status based on the images of the image history. IV Sensor Simulation (Page 7-14)
Exiting the Simulator Save the batch backup file (*.iva). Exiting the Simulator (Page 7-5)
Transferring to the sensor Transfer the batch backup file (*.iva) to the sensor. Transferring to the sensor (Page 7-5)
7-3
Simulator
Starting the Simulator
1 Double-click the [IV-Navigator] icon on the 3 Select a file and click the [Open] button.
desktop.
2 Click the [Open file] button.

Files with the formats other than iva format cannot be used.
7
Simulator
7-4
The main screen for the Simulator opens. yyIf the [Language] is clicked, the Select language screen opens. Select the arbitrary language so that the language to be displayed can be switched. yyThe Simulator can be opened by doubleclicking an IVA file. The [Open] screen opens.
Simulator screen and operation flow

This section explains the screen to be displayed in the Simulator and the operation flow. For details of what can be set on each screen and its operations, see to the applicable references. Main screen of the Simulator
(Page 7-6)
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation)

Check/Edit the program settings. (Page 7-8)
Perform the IV Sensor Simulation based on the image history. (Page 7-14)
Simulator
Exiting the Simulator

If the [Sensor Setup Simulation] or [IV Sensor Simulation] is activating, exit it.
Transferring to the sensor

the sensor.
1 Return to the main screen for the Simulator. 1 Transfer the saved batch backup file to 2 Select [File] [Terminate IV-Simulator]
from the menu bar.
When the program setting or image history has been changed, the confirmation dialog to save appears. Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor (Page 6-23)
You can also use Monitor (IV-30) to transfer the batch backup file (*.iva) to the sensor. For details, refer to the IV Series Users Manual (Monitor).
The Save As screen opens.

Change the saving destination of the file and file name as needed. The change contents are saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) and the system returns to the Activation Menu screen.
7
Simulator
yyIf you want to reduce the file size, delete the entire image history with the [Image Hist.] on the main screen of the Simulator or the [Delete] button of [IV Sensor Simulation] before saving the file. Only the settings are saved and the file size becomes small. yyWhen saving with the Simulator, Statistics/Histogram screen in operation and Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation are not be saved.
7-5
Names and Functions of the Screen

Main screen of the Simulator
(1) (8) (9) (10) (15) (16) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(11) (12) (13)
(17) (14)
7
Simulator
(1) File name Displays the file name of the batch backup file (*.iva) being opened by the Simulator. (2) [Save] button Saves the settings being set in the Simulator into the batch backup file (*.iva). Save (Page 7-18) (3) Program information Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). Programs can be switched from the pull-down menu. (4) [Detail] button Displays the Program Details screen. Displaying the Program Details screen (Page 6-11) (5) [Image Hist.] button Displays the sensors internal image history saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) being opened. Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15) (6) [I/O Settings] button Displays the I/O Settings screen. I/O Settings (Page 7-21)
(7) [Advanced] button Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen. Advanced Sensor Settings (Page 7-21) (8) Menu bar Operating from the menu bar (Page 7-18) (9) Status bar Displays the image type (Master) and trigger type. (10) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the image being displayed in the Simulator. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (11) Tool window Displays the selected tool region with an orange frame. You can also switch the selected tool by clicking the designated region. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7) (12) Search Region If the search region of the selected tool is being set to Partial, the search region will be displayed with a light blue frame. (13) Brightness correction region When the brightness correction is being set, the brightness correction region will be displayed with a blue frame.
7-6
(14) Sensor Information Displays the Model and Device Name (Page 6-31) for the sensor. (15) [Sensor Setup Simulation] button Displays the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation) screen. Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation) (Page 7-8) (16) [IV Sensor Simulation] button Displays the IV Sensor Simulation screen. IV Sensor Simulation (Page 7-14) (17) Master image display Displays the master image registered to the currently selected program.
7
Simulator
7-7

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow
This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow. For details of the contents which can set on each setting screen and its operations, refer to the applicable references. Image Optimization
1. Image Optimization (Page 7-9)
7
Simulator
Master Registration
2. Master Registration (Page 7-10)
Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings (Page 7-12)
Output Assignment
4. Output Assignment (Page 7-13)
7-8
Confirm the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. In the Settings Navigator of the Simulator, the settings of the Image Optimization can only be confirmed. Image Optimization cannot be changed.
Main screen for the Image Optimization

Explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1) (2) (4)
(3) (5)
7
Simulator
(6)
(7)
(1) Title Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) Image display screen Only displays a message. The image will not be displayed. (4) Settings button Displays the settings which can be confirmed in the Image Optimization. Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8) Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13) Extended Functions for the Image Optimization (Page 4-16)
(5) Setting confirmation screen Displays the settings of the item selected by the settings button in the tab format. (6) [Next to STEP2] button Proceeds to "2. Master Registration". 2. Master Registration (Page 7-10) (7) [Exit Setup] button Finishes the Settings Navigator. Settings Navigator screen and operation flow (Page 7-8)
7-9
Register a master image to be a reference for judgment. Also, set the Brightness Correction. In the Settings Navigator of the Simulator, the following images can be registered as master image. yyImages of the image history saved in the currently opened batch backup file (*.iva) yyMaster image or images of the image history saved in a batch backup file (*.iva) other than the one currently opened yyImage capture file (*.ivp)
Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the Master Registration.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
7
Simulator
7-10
(6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Title Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) [Image type] display Displays the image type. Displays the master image. yyMaster............... (4) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the master image. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (5) Image by the sensor Displays the master image.
(6) Edit settings screen Displays the settings for the Master Registration in the tab format. Master registration from the image history in the sensor (Page 7-11) Master registration using the file saved in the PC (Page 7-11) Extended Functions for the Master Registration (Page 4-25) (7) [Back] button Returns to the settings screen for the Image Optimization. 1. Image Optimization (Page 7-9) (8) [Next to STEP3] button Proceeds to 3. Tool settings. 3. Tool Settings (Page 7-12) (9) [Exit Setup] button Finishes the Settings Navigator. Settings Navigator screen and operation flow (Page 7-8)
Registering the master image

Master registration from the image history in the sensor
Register the image of the image history saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) as a master image. To perform a master image registration from the image history in sensor, the image to be registered as a master image in the image history must be saved in advance. Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15) Master For details of procedures, refer to registration from the image history in the sensor (Page 4-22).
7
Simulator
Master registration using the file saved in the PC

Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp) stored in the PC, and register as a master image. yySave the image to be registered as a master image into any PC in advance. yyThe files which can be registered as a master image are batch backup files (*.iva) and the image capture files (*.ivp). Folder composition and file naming rules (Page 6-25) yyRegister images taken with a sensor with the same installation conditions and the same image-related settings (exposure conditions etc.). Otherwise correct judgment may not be possible. For details of procedures, Master registration using the file refer to saved in the PC (Page 4-23).
7-11
3. Tool Settings
Tools for judgment of the quality of the target can be added, edited, copied, and deleted. For details, refer to 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28). In the Settings Navigator for the Simulator, following buttons will not be displayed. yy[Live Adjustment] button for adjustment of the threshold of each tool yy[to Live Image] button for color extraction (Color Area tool) and for brightness extraction (Area tool)
Main screen for the Tool settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1) (2) (6) (7) (3) (4)
7
Simulator
7-12
(5)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1) Title Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) [Image type] display Displays the image type. Displays the master image. yyMaster............... (4) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the master image. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (5) Master image Displays a master image and a tool window. If a search region is set, the tool window which indicates the search region (light blue) will be displayed. By clicking the tool window, the selected tool can be switched.
(6) Tool settings button Adds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool. Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool (Page 4-31) (7) Tool list Displays a list of tools set in the program and a threshold of each tool. (8) [Back] button The system returns to the Master Registration screen. 2. Master Registration (Page 7-10) (9) [Next to STEP4] button Proceeds to output assignment. 4. Output Assignment (Page 7-13) (10) [Exit Setup] button Finishes the Settings Navigator. Settings Navigator screen and operation flow (Page 7-8)
Set the output items to be assigned to the output line (OUT1 to OUT4). Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor (Page 2-8) Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line (Page 8-1)
Main screen for the Output Assignment

This section explains the main screen for the Output Assignment.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (6)
(5)
(7)
7
Simulator
(8)
(9)
(1) Title Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and program name (Page 6-12). (2) Shortcut button Displays the shortcut button to each step. (3) [Image type] display Displays the image type. Displays the master image. yyMaster............... (4) Image tool bar Displays the tools for operating the image taken by the sensor. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (5) Master image Displays the master image.
(6) Tool settings button yy[Output Assignment] tab Assigns the output item to each output line. Setting the Output Assignment (Page 4-61) yy[Extended Functions] tab Sets the total status conditions and logics. Setting the Total Status Conditions (Page 4-63) Setting Logics (Page 4-64) (7) [Valid]/[Invalid] setting for the trigger error output Selects whether to enable/disable the output when the trigger error occurred. Error Messages (Page A-19) (8) [Back] button Returns to the Tool settings screen. 3. Tool Settings (Page 7-12) (9) [Complete] button Finishes the Settings Navigator. Settings Navigator screen and operation flow (Page 7-8)
7-13
Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation
For Outline/Position Adjustment tool
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(9) (10) (11) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
(12)
7
Simulator (1) [Batch retest] button Performs batch operation simulation for all images. (2) [Reset] button Resets the result of batch operation simulation for every image. The status result will be [--]. (3) Operating button for operation simulation .... Start operation simulation yy (Reproduction) one by one in order from the selected history image. The reproduction speed (Fast/ Normal/Slow) can be selected by clicking the [] button. yy yy yy (Stop).......... Stop the operation simulation being reproduced. (Back).......... Shift the history image selection one position to the left. (Next)........... Shift the history image selection one position to the right. yy
(Repeat)...... When this button is ON (
),
the operation simulation is repeated from the first history image after the operation simulation for the last history image ends. Repeat can be switched ON/OFF during reproduction. Transition to the next OK yy (Go to the .... next OK Image) image after the selected history image. Transition to the next NG yy (Go to the .... next NG Image) image after the selected history image. When (Go to the next OK Image) / (Go to the next NG Image) is executed after the settings for a threshold etc. have been changed, the judgment result may be changed depending on the simulation result. (4) [Add Image] button Add an image to be used for the operation simulation from a batch backup file (*.iva) or an image capture file (*.ivp).
7-14
(5) [Delete] button Deletes the selected image. The type of the image to be deleted can be selected by clicking the [] button. Deletes all images. yyDelete All............. Deletes all of OK images. yyDelete OK only.... Deletes all of NG images. yyDelete NG only.... Deletes all images on the yyDelete all images.... on the left from left from the one selected. the one selected Deletes all images on the yyDelete all images.... on the right from right from the one selected. the one selected When an image has been deleted from the menu displayed by clicking the [] button, the [Undo Delete] button becomes disabled. The deletion of the image cannot be undone. (6) [Undo Delete] button Restores an image which have been deleted by clicking the [Delete] button. You can undo back up to 20 images. (7) Number of OKs/NGs Displays the number of images for which the judgment result from the operation simulation is OK or NG. (8) Image number Display the image No. of the history images read into the Simulator as (Currently selected image No.)/(Total number of images).
(9) Thumbnail image (image history) The image becoming the target of theoperation simulation. Displays the number of triggers, the status result of the operation simulation, and the thumbnail image. yyFor details of number of triggers, refer to Displaying the statistical information (Page 5-10). yyUnnecessary images can be deleted ((5) [Delete] button) and necessary images can be added from a different file ((4) [Add Image] button). yyThe display order can be changed by drag and drop of the selected image. The [Undo Delete] button becomes disabled when the display order has been changed. yyIn the initial status, the newest image is at the left edge. The history becomes older from the left to the right. (10) Image being selected (Orange frame) Indicates the image being selected. IV Sensor Simulation is performed automatically for the selected image and the judgment result is displayed. (11) Status result Displays the judgment result for IV Sensor Simulation for the selected thumbnail image. (12) Magnified display screen Magnifies the selected thumbnail image. Operating the image tool bar (Page 3-11) (13) Status gauge Displays the tools set in the program. Tool name, threshold, matching rate for each tool and status result are displayed. Status result OK is displayed in green and NG is displayed in red. yyJudge is OK
7
Simulator
Tool Name
yyJudge is NG
Threshold Matching rate and status result
For details of status results, refer to Displaying and outputting the status result (Page A-4).
7-15
(14) Tool Name Displays the tool name of the selected tool. (15) Judgment record Displays the number of images for OK or NG. Displays the number of images for OK. yyOK..... Displays the number of images for NG. yyNG..... (16) Matching rate information Displays the maximum value of the yyMAX...... matching rate. Displays the minimum value of the yyMIN....... matching rate. Displays the average value of the yyAVE....... matching rate.
For Color Area/Area tool

During operation simulation for the Color Area/Area tool, [Color Extraction (Color Area tool)], [Brightness Extraction (Area tool)], and [Upper Limit] are displayed in addition to the functions displayed on the main screen of the Outline tool/Position Adjustment tool.
* The screen for the Color Area tool
7
Simulator
(17) Histogram Displays the result of the operation simulation for the selected tool as a histogram (frequency distribution). With the threshold being a border, the range for OK is displayed in green and for NG is displayed in red. Displays the distribution range yyAbscissa axis.... of the matching rate. The display range is fixed. It cannot be specified arbitrary. This will be adjusted yyVertical axis....... automatically according to the maximum value of the frequency. It cannot be specified arbitrary. (18) Matching rate of the latest judgment process Displays the matching rate of the latest judgment process. The status result changes according to the setting of the threshold value. (19) Threshold Displays the threshold of the selected tool. The threshold value can be changed by dragging the slider. (20) [Complete] button The system returns to the main screen for the Simulator.
(1)
(2)
(1) Color Extraction (Color Area tool)/ Brightness Extraction (Area tool) The screen for setting the Color Area/Area extraction range appears when the [Setup] button is clicked. For details of setting procedures, refer to Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-44). (2) Upper Limit When the checkbox for the upper limit threshold is checked , the slider for setting the upper and the lower limit of the threshold appears. For details of setting procedures, refer to Setting the upper limit (Page 4-48).
Other than the above, the main screen of IVSensorSimulation for the ColorArea / Area tool is the same as the main screen of IVSensorSimulation for the Outline tool/Position Adjustment tool. For Outline/Position Adjustment tool (Page 7-14)
7-16
Starting the IV Sensor Simulation
5 After the IV Sensor Simulation is
1 Displays the main screen for the

Simulator.
Starting the Simulator (Page 7-4)
completed, click the [Complete] button at the lower right on the screen.
The system returns to the main screen for the Simulator. The test results will not be saved. If you want to check the test results again, perform IV Sensor Simulation (Batch retest) with the same settings and the same image history.
2 Click the [IV Sensor Simulation] button.
The message dialog appears.
7
Simulator
The IV Sensor Simulation screen opens.
4 Perform the IV Sensor Simulation by

clicking the [Batch retest] button.
For operations of IV Sensor Simulation, refer to Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation (Page 7-14). Please perform Batch retest when the setting for Color Extraction/Brightness Extraction or the setting of the threshold has been changed. If this is not done, pay attention to the following items. yyThe frequency distribution of the histogram is not displayed correctly (when the setting has been changed, the matching rate may change after retesting). yyThe Number of OKs/NGs and the Judgment record are not updated.
7-17

[File] menu
Open file
Opens the batch backup file (*.iva) saved in the PC.
Save
Save the contents set with the Simulator as a batch backup file (*.iva) to the PC.
1 Select [File] [Open file] from the menu

bar.
The [Open] screen opens.
1 Select [File] [Save] from the menu bar.

The save as screen opens.
2 Select a file and click the [Open] button.
7
Simulator Files with the formats other than iva format cannot be used. The main screen for the Simulator opens.
7-18
The system returns to the main screen for the Simulator.
Export
Save Program Settings List
Outputs the sensor information held in theIVSimulator as the tab-delimited text. For details, refer to Program Settings List (Page 6-45).
Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation

Outputs the same statistical information and histogram information as when operating with sensor as the tab-delimited text. The histogram data at the time of IV Operation Simulation is not output. For details, refer to Statistics/Histogram Data (Page 6-45).
Check Statistics/Histogram in operation

Displays the statistical information and the histogram information at the time of operation with a sensor, saved in a batch backup file (*.iva). If one of the following cases applies for the batch backup file (*.iva), display is not possible because the statistical information and the histogram information in operation has not been saved. yyWhen saving has been done in the sensor with the version of the sensor operation software which is less than R1.10 yyWhen saving has been done without performing judgment processing even once after power ON or after program switching yyWhen saving has been done with the Simulator Display is not performed when saving has been done with the Simulator even when the settings or the image history have not been changed.
Terminate IV-Simulator
Terminates the Simulator and returns to the Activation Menu screen. Refer to Exiting the Simulator (Page 7-5).
Exit
Exit the IV-Navigator.
1 Select [File] [Exit] from the menu bar. 2 Click the [Yes] button.
When the program setting or image history has been changed, the confirmation dialog to save appears.
The change contents are saved in a batch backup file (*.iva) and the IV-Navigator terminates.
7
Simulator
1 Select [File] [Check Statistics/
Histogram in operation] from the menu bar.

The Statistics/Histogram screen in operation appears.
[View] menu
Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator
Switch is made between message display and no message display when the [IV Sensor Simulation] button is clicked. Select [View] [Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator] from the menu bar, and then select [Show]/[Hide].
When multiple tools have been set, the statistical information and histogram information at display can be switched by selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.
7-19
[Image] menu
Zoom
Reduce
Reduces the image displayed on the Simulator. For details, refer to Zoom Out (Page 6-47).
Capture
Save Image
Saves the bmp format file of the image displayed in the Simulator and the ivp format file which can be used for a master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning at the same time. The IV-Navigators screen will also be saved at the same time (screenshot). Select [Image] [Capture] [Save Image] from the menu bar.
Enlarge
Enlarges the image displayed on the Simulator. For details, refer to Zoom In (Page 6-47).
Fit to Window
Show saved image file location

Opens the saving destination folder of the captured image. Select [Image] [Capture] [Show saved image file location] from the menu bar.
7
Simulator
Displays the image displayed on the Simulator by fitting it to the screen size. For details, refer to Fit to Window (Page 6-47).
Change saved image file location
Tool Display Options

Switches the display method of the tool. Tool Display Options (Page For details, refer to 6-47).
Opens the reference screen of a folder and changes a saving destination of the captured image. For details, refer to Change saved image file location (Page 6-48).
[Setting] menu
Language
Switches the display language of the IV-Navigator. For details, refer to Language (Page 6-49). The displayed language can be switched on the Activation Menu screen of the IV-Navigator (Page 3-2).
7-20
[Window] menu
Program Details
Displays the Program Details screen. Select [Window] [Program Details] from the menu bar. For details on the Program Details screen, refer to Displaying the Program Details screen (Page 6-11).

Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen. Select [Window] [Advanced Sensor Settings] from the menu bar. For details on the Advanced Sensor Settings screen, refer to Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor (Page 6-30). The following limitations apply for the Advanced Sensor Settings screen with Simulator. yyThe [Backup] tab and the [Initialize/Update] tab are not displayed. yyThe sensor setting contents saved in the batch backup file (*.iva) can be confirmed. yySetting change is possible for [Security] and [Device Name].
Sensors Internal Image History

Displays the Sensors internal Image history screen. Select [Window] [Sensors Internal Image History] from the menu bar. For details on the Sensors internal image history screen, refer to Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-15). Following buttons and menus will not be displayed in the Sensors internal image history screen of the Simulator. yy[Refresh] button yy[Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button yy[Batch Backup (*.iva)] menu
7
Simulator
[Help] menu
User's Manual
Opens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the selected language. Users Manual (Page 6-50). For details, refer to
Version information I/O Settings

Displays the I/O Settings screen. Select [Window] [I/O Settings] from the menu bar. For details on the I/O Settings screen, refer to Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor (Page 6-26). The [I/O Monitor] tab is not displayed on the I/O Settings screen with Simulator. Only confirmation is possible for [Polarity]. Displays the version information of the IV-Navigator. For details, refer to Version information (Page 6-50).
7-21
MEMO
7
Simulator
7-22
8
Controlling with Input/Output Line
This chapter explains how the input/output terminal controls each operation.
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers.....................................8-2 Importing the Status Output..............................8-4 Changing Over....................................................8-7 Registering the Master Image...........................8-8 Clearing Errors.................................................8-10 Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on..........................................................8-11 Input Response Time.......................................8-12
8
Controlling with the Input/Output Line
8-1
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

For details of the trigger, refer to Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8) .
External trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External Trigger], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of inputting the external trigger input.
Trigger 1 Min 100 s Min 1.2 ms Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4
External trigger input
ON OFF ON OFF
(1)
Processing time
(5)
BUSY output Judgment process (internal) Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Each logic output Trigger error output
(2)
Max 2 ms
(3)
Trigger delay Min 0.2 ms Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Max 2 ms Result from Trigger 4
ON OFF ON OFF
Previous result
8
(4)
(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 s for ON, and 1.2 ms for OFF. (2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings. (3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is performed. (4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output. (5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid]. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yyThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-25) is NPN, and indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP. yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input. Input Settings (Page 6-26) yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to Changing the timing of the status output (Page 8-6). [One-Shot], refer to
8-2
Internal trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal Trigger], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of set trigger interval.
Internal trigger
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5
(1) BUSY output Judgment process (internal) Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Each logic output Trigger error output ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF (2) (3)
Trigger interval Processing time
Trigger interval
Trigger interval
Trigger interval
(5)
Min 0.2 ms Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
(4)
(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set. (2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs depending on the settings. (3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings. (4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output. (5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid]. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to Changing the timing of the status output (Page 8-6). [One-Shot], refer to Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.
8
Operating in the shortest cycle

To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input to 1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the output assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-60) to [Off] and ignore the trigger error.
8-3
Importing the Status Output

Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on assigning to output line, refer to 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60) .
Importing the total status / total status NG output

Overall status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be checked.
External trigger/Internal trigger ON OFF
Min 0.2 ms Trigger 1 Processing time
White line: OUT 2 Assign the BUSY output Black line: OUT 1 Assign the total status/ total status NG output
ON OFF
Previous total status result
Total status result of Trigger 1
8
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the Changing the timing of the status output (Page 8-6). output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to yyWhen the total status result was OK, the total status output turns ON. When the total status result was NG, the total status output turns OFF. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. yy[All Tools OK] When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK. yy[Any Tool OK] When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK, the total status result is OK. yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 4] When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK. yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is switched or external master image is registered. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
8-4
Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic

The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Trigger input
Trigger 1 Processing time
Black line: OUT 1 Assign the BUSY output White line: OUT 2 Assign "Tool 1" Gray line: OUT 3 Assign "Tool 2" Orange line: OUT 4 Assign "Logic 1"
ON OFF
Min 0.2 ms
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Previous result Previous result Previous result
Status result of Tool 1 Status result of Tool 2 Status result of Logic 1
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the Changing the timing of the status output (Page 8-6). output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually. yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool / logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result was NG or --. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON. When Output Settings (Page 6-24) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF. yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.
8
8-5
Changing the timing of the status output

The timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot] which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to Output Settings (Page 6-27) .
External trigger/Internal trigger BUSY output Status output (Latching output) Status output (One-Shot output) ON OFF
Min 0.2 ms Trigger 1 Trigger 2
ON OFF ON OFF
Previous status result
Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 1 Delay time One-Shot ON Time
Status result of Trigger 2 Status result of Trigger 2 Delay time One-Shot ON Time
yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment. yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed. yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns OFF before each process is completed.
8
Cancelling One-Shot output

To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met. Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is cancelled and is not output.
External trigger/Internal trigger BUSY output Internal process of Trigger 1 Internal process of Trigger 2 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Delay time Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger input interval
(1)
(2)
Delay time
Status result of Trigger 1 (internal) One-Shot ON Time
(3)
Delay time
Status result of Trigger 2 (internal) One-Shot ON Time
Judgment process
Status result of Trigger 1 One-Shot ON Time
(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time. (2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally. (3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1 is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output. yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by a fluctuating BUSY time. BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time
8-6
Changing Over
Changing Over
Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the input line. For details of program functions, refer to Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) (Page 6-6) .
External trigger/Internal trigger Program bit0 to bit4 Input BUSY output ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF (1)
PROG00 Switching time (T1) Min 10 ms PROG01 Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3
(5)
PROG02 Switching time
(2)
T2
(4)
PROG01 Min 0 ms PROG02
Program number Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Each logic output Trigger error output
PROG00
Previous result
Result from Trigger 1
(3)
(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched. Minimum input time is 10 ms. When switching the program by the external input (Page 6-10) (2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings. (3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is completed. (4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings. (5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under the Settings Navigator to [Valid]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed after the switching program is completed. Input Response Time (Page 8-12). yyFor details on T1 and T2, refer to yyUse this function during operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup. yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen. yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal Trigger], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching the program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur. yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching programs and external master registration process will vary. yyThe response of an image displayed on the IV-Navigator might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY output OFF).
8
8-7
Registering the Master Image

The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line. For details on master image registration, refer to 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20) .
External trigger/Internal trigger External master registration input BUSY output Judgment process (internal) Master image (internal) Total status output Status output of each tool Position adjustment output Each logic output (1) Trigger 1
(Min 2 ms) Min 2 ms
(7) Trigger 2
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Image of Trigger 1
(2)
Master image registration time (T3)
(3)
T4
(5)
Previous master image Image of Trigger 1
(4)
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2
8
Error output
(6) In case of failure
(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger. (2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms. (3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs depends on the settings. (4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image registration is completed. (5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image. (6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image registration is succeeded or by the clear error input. (7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.
8-8
Input Response Time (Page 8-12). yyFor details of T3 and T4, refer to yyUse this function during operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during setup. yyIf the trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid]. y y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled, the image taken before cancellation is registered as a master image. The master image registration process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings. yyDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being performed. The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary. yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the Input Settings (Page 6-26) . internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to ROM writing settings Master image is registered externally when power is turned OFF The master image is not deleted. The image can be used as a master image after starting up the device next time. The master image is deleted. External master image registration needs to be performed after starting up the device. Number of times that external master image registration can perform (duration) 100,000 times
8
Yes
No
No limit
yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode before the power is turned OFF. yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3). Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.
8-9
Clearing Errors
Clearing Errors
If an error targeted for clearing is occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input.
Error occurred (Min 2 ms) Min 2 ms
Clear Error input
ON OFF
(2)
T5
Error output
ON OFF
(1)
8
(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON. Error types which can be output are as follows. yySystem error yyStartup memory readout error yyExternal master registration error yyTrigger error To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid]. yyFTP error To output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-36) to [Enable]. (2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms. Errors which can be cleared are as follows. yyExternal master registration error yyTrigger error yyFTP error The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared. yyFor details on T5, refer to Input Response Time (Page 8-12).
8-10
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on

Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when starting operation.
Initializing 2 seconds or longer BUSY 20 ms or longer RUN Setting RUN System error
Power (DC24V)
ON OFF (1)
Determine the I/O settings
Program number
(2)
Trigger Trigger
BUSY output
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Min 0 ms
(3)
(4)
(5)
Error output
(6)
Min 0.2 ms Min 0.2 ms
RUN output
Total status output Status output of each tool ON Position adjustment output OFF Each logic output
8
(1) After the power turned ON, the I/O settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined. Operation for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-9) I/O Polarity (Page 6-28) Output Settings (Page 6-27) (2) The program number will be determined. When the "Enable program switching through external input" (Page 6-26) check box is set to ON , the program number is determined according to the inputting condition of the input line. (3) BUSY output function turns ON. yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON. yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur. (4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate. yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF. yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON. By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked. (5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status. (6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring. yyThe ON status of each output is as follows. The status when the NPN or PNP open collector is ON. When the Output Settings (Page 6-27) is [N.O.] : When the Output Settings (Page 6-27) is [N.C.] : The status when the NPN or PNP open collector is OFF. yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output assignment for program numbers (Page 4-60) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs are not being assigned, it will not be output.
8-11
Input Response Time
Input Response Time
The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response time differs greatly depending on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for securing from the affect of different response times.
Response time for the switch program input

T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + E + 50 [ms] (typ.) T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the external master registration input

T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + E + 50 [ms] (typ.) T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the error clear input
8
T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Description for symbols

Symbols A Description Judgment process cancelling time * Time 400 (800) [ms] (typ.) Added when it is input during the judgment process. Total of the "Registration time x Number of set tools" for following each tool Position adjustment : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.) Outline : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.) Color area : 100 [ms] (typ.) Area : 100 [ms] (typ.) 860 [ms] (typ.) Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] (Page 6-35) is set to [Individual]. 3500 [ms] (typ.) Added only when the [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save] (Page 6-26) is set to [Yes]. Trigger delay setting time (0 to 1000) [ms] Added only when the [External Trigger] (Page 4-10) is selected for trigger type.
Tool registration time *
Auto focus position adjustment time Nonvolatile memory saving time Trigger delay time
* These are the times in case the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later. The times for the version R1.00 are those inside ().
8-12
9
Specifications
This chapter explains the specifications and dimensions of the sensor and software.
Specifications.....................................................9-2 Dimensions.........................................................9-5
9
Specifications
9-1
Specifications
Specifications
Sensor
Model Installed distance IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA Standard range 50 to 500mm Installed distance 50 mm : 25 (H) x 18 (V) mm to Installed distance 500mm : 210 (H) x 157 (V) mm 1/3 inch color CMOS Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1 Short range 50 to 150mm Long range 300 to 2000mm
View
Installed distance Installed distance 50mm : 300mm : 12 (H) x 9 (V) mm 45 (H) x 33 (V) mm to to Installed distance Installed distance 150mm : 2000mm : 36 (H) x 27 (V) mm 300 (H) x 225 (V) mm 1/3 inch monochrome CMOS
Image sensor Pixel Focus adjustment Exposure time Amplifier type Light Lighting method Type Number*2
752 (H) x 480 (V) Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1 1/10 to 1/50,000 White LED 1/10 to 1/25,000 1/20 to 1/25,000 1/10 to 1/25,000 Infrared LED
Red LED
Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, Position adjustment Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool 32 programs 100 images*4 300 images*5
9
Specifications
Tool
Switch settings (programs) Image history*3 Numbers Condition
NG only/All is selectable OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchable Statistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors, judge results list by tools Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs HDR, High Gain, Color Filters*7, Digital Zoom*8, Brightness Correction, Tilt correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run, ToolAutoTune, Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*9 PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower, ON current 2mA (short circuit) For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 15V or higher, OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)
Analysis information *6
Other functions Indicators
Input
Inputs Function
6 inputs (IN1 to IN6) IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions Assignable functions : Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration
9-2
Specifications
Model
IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA, remaining voltage 1.5V or lower For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA, remaining voltage 2V or lower 4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4) Enable by assigning the optional functions Assignable functions : Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result, Judge result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET DC 24V 10% (including ripple)
Output
Outputs Function Standard
Ethernet*10
Connector M12 4pin connector Power voltage
Network function Rating
Consumption 0.6A or less current Ambient 0 to +50C (No freezing) temperature Relative humidity Vibration 35 to 85%RH (No condensation) 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
9
Specifications
Environmental resistance
Shock 500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times resistance Enclosure IP67 rating*11
Material Weight
Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic, Mounting adapter : POM Approx. 270 g
*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the operation. The focusing position can be registered by programs. *2 Tools can be installed by programs. *3 Saves to the memory in the sensor. The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the software for IV (IV-H1). *4 70 images when using the FTP client function *5 210 images when using the FTP client function *6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the IV software (IV-H1). *7 Color type only. *8 Monochrome type only. *9 This function can be used with the software for IV (IV-H1). *10 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software (IV-H1). *11 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted.
9-3
Specifications
IV Software
Model Interface OS Languages Processor Memory capacity IV-H1 Equip the Ethernet (100BASE-TX) interface Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *1 Windows XP Professional/HomeEdition One of the OS must be installed. Japanese / English / German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean Windows 7: Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS. Windows XP: Pentium III or better Clock speed 1 GHz or faster Windows 7: Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS. Windows XP: 512 MB or more (1GB or more is recommended)
System requirements
Required capacity 1 GB or more for installation Monitor Operating conditions Resolution 1024 768 pixel or higher, display color High Color (16bit) or higher .NET Framework 2.0 SP 2 needs to be installed *2.
9
Specifications
*1 Supported for 32bit and 64bit version. *2 If .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 is not being installed, this will be automatically installed at the time of IV-H1 installation.
9-4
Dimensions
Dimensions
Sensor
yyIV-500C yyIV-500CA yyIV-150M yyIV-150MA yyIV-500M yyIV-500MA yyIV-2000M yyIV-2000MA
(102)
R 50
52
R5
(108) 50 0.4 81.5 10.5 41 10.5 6
Focusing position adjustment screw (MF type only)
3-M3 (Depth 6mm)
9
Specifications
32.4
57.4
50
56 58
Mounting adapter 1/4-20UNC (Depth 6mm)
WD reference surface 45.5 25 4-M4 (Depth 6mm)
20
10.5
20.5
9-5
Dimensions
yyWith dome attachment Installed distance : 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachment Compatible sensor : Standard range type/Short range type
134
62
Distance from WD reference surface
yyWith polarizing filter attachment

32
9
5 Distance from WD reference surface
Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment
yyIV-D10
90.4
56
9-6
134
34.6
Specifications
Dimensions
Polarizing filter attachment

yyOP-87436 yyOP-87437
32
Front cover
yyOP-87461
27.1 0.4
56
Mounting adapter
yyOP-87460
4-3.2 6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm
50
57
9
1/4-20UNC (Depth 6mm)
Specifications
56
20
4-M4 (Depth 6mm) 17 25
Power I/O cable

yyOP-87440 (2m)
45 15
yyOP-87441 (5m)
2000 5000 10000
yyOP-87442 (10m)
6.7
120
5 150 5 180
9-7
Dimensions
Bracket
yyOP-87685
0.4 112.5 56
50
31.6
99 (99)
58
41
9
Specifications
Communication cables
Ethernet cable
yyOP-87454 (2m)
16.8
NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable

yyOP-87456 (10m)
14
yyOP-87455 (5m)
6.2
yyOP-87457 (2m)
14.7
yyOP-87458 (5m)
6.5
82.5
19.6
48.4
93
yyOP-87459 (10m)
15 47
44.7
2000 5000 10000
44.1
51.3
2000 5000 10000
9-8
Appendices
Status Table.......................................................A-2 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool................................. A-5 Settings List.......................................................A-6 Troubleshooting..............................................A-16 Error Messages...............................................A-19 Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor............................. A-25 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)............................................. A-35 Maintenance.....................................................A-36 Index.................................................................A-38
A-1
Status Table
Status Table
Status table
Sensor operation indicator light Status Waiting for a trigger Judgment processing Running
*2
PC screen type
PWR/ERR
OUT *3
TRIG OFF *5 OFF
Switching programs Registering the external master image During threshold adjustment on the Test screen Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc. Focus Adjustment (MF)
Lighting (green)
*9
Test
Blink (green) OFF
OFF *14
*5 OFF *13
Setting
Automatically adjusting brightness Automatically adjusting the focus (AF) Setup Adjustment I/O Monitor Others Running Setting
Live Blink (green) Live Blink (red) Lighting (red) OFF
*15 OFF
Trigger error Error
Same as normal
External master registration error System error Startup memory readout error OFF OFF
/ indicates enable/disable of the input. ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C). yyFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output. OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output. yyFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output. OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output. *1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG. When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON. When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON. The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. Setting the Total Status Conditions (Page 4-63) When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG. *2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of [Sensors internal image history] screen in the main screen of [Run]. *3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process. OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red) *4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process. *5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal). When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.
A-2
Status Table
Input External trigger External Switch master image programs registration *7 *6 *10 *11 *8 *11 *10 Same as while running *13 OFF *16 Same as normal OFF *17 OFF ON Clear Error BUSY OFF
Output Total Status / Total status NG / Each tool / Each logic / Pos.Adj. *1 *4 ON *12 OFF RUN Error
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF Same as normal OFF *17
OFF
ON OFF
*17
*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs. *7 Stops the judgment process and switches. *8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previous taken image as a master image. *9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result will be displayed. *10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input. *11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate. *12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF. *13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates. *14 The flashing cycle of the orange light changes by linking to the focus indicator. The STATUS indicator light operates in the same way. *15 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated. *16 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned functions will not operate. *17 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the polarity (NPN/PNP) settings. Additionally, refer to Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line (Page 8-1) .
A-3
Status Table
Displaying and outputting the status result

Judgment of each tool Status Waiting for a trigger (Not judged) *3 Judge is OK Judge is NG Unable to judge *6 Display Judgment -OK NG -Matching rate *1 --0 to 100 0 to 100 --Output OFF ON OFF OFF *6 Total Status *2 Display -*4 OFF Output OFF Total Status NG Output OFF *5 ON
*1 When the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected. The cut-off process (Page A-5) may be performed for the outline tool and the position adjustment tool. *2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. Setting the Total Status Conditions (Page 4-63) *3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has changed, or after a shift from the setting mode to the run mode. *4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON. *5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON. *6 The judgment of position adjustment tool cannot be determined if the judgment of each tool cannot be determined at the time of using the position adjustment tool. For details, refer to Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment (Page A-4).
Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment
Position Window adjustment protrusion *1 result No Succeeded Yes
Display/output View judgment Status output View matching rate View judgment Status output View matching rate View judgment
Judgment of each tool Pos. Adj. OK ON 0 to 100 OK ON 0 to 100 NG OFF 0 to 100 Outline OK/NG ON/OFF 0 to 100 OK/NG ON/OFF 0 to 100 -OFF --*7
Total Total Status Color Area/ Status *2 NG Area OK/NG ON/OFF 0 to 100 -- *6 OFF ---OFF --*6 *5
*3
*4
*3
*4
NG OFF ON
Failed
Status output View matching rate
*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area (Page 4-17) at the time of position adjustment succeeded. *2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. Setting the Total Status Conditions (Page 4-63) *3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON. *4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON. *5 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected when the setting scale has been changed. *6 For details of the targets outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to Matching rate at the time of protrusion (Page A-5) *7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area.
A-4
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Matching rate at the time of protrusion
When the search region is Entire zz
When the target outline protrudes from the imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded from the target for calculating the matching rate. The matching rate decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.
Tool window Protruding outline (excluded from the target for calculating the matching rate)
Cut-off process of the matching rate

Cut-off process means the process where the outline detection process is ended when no outline exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value) below the threshold value is found. A matching rate which has been cut off becomes 0. Because the cut-off value is linked to the threshold, the cut-off value is also changed when the threshold is changed.
(Cut-off value) Matching rate Threshold
Outline to be targeted for calculating the matching rate
Current matching rate Cut-off processing range (Range where the matching rate becomes 0)
Imaging area
When the search region is Partial zz

The sensor searches the outline of the target that is in the search region. The matching rate of the target being out of search region will be 0. If the target is being protruded from the imaging area, the matching rate will decrease depends on how much the target is protruded from the imaging area. The above behavior is the case that the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later. For the version R1.00, the matching rate decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.
When the tool window after position adjustment is protruded from the imaging area, the judgment display of the Color Area/Area tool becomes -(Unable to judge) and the status output turns OFF.
A-5
Settings List
Settings List
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen
1 Image Optimization
Menu Description Setting range Internal Trigger Trigger interval:1 to 10,000 ms (default value: 50ms) External Trigger Trigger delay:0 to 1,000 ms (default value: 0ms) yyNormal (default value) yyHDR yyHigh Gain Reference page
Trigger Options
Select a type of the timing to start imaging. Automatically adjusts a light intensity of the light and a shutter speed. Select an imaging mode of the sensor. Displays a current exposure time.
4-8
Automatic Brightness Adjustment Imaging Mode Exposure Time Brightness Adjustment
4-11 4-11 4-11
Standard range type (color) 1 to 100 Standard range type Manually adjusts a light (monochrome) Brightness intensity of the built-in light 1 to 120 and a shutter speed. Short range type 1 to 120 Long rang type 1 to 100 Resets the image taken by the sensor to the state before Undo brightness adjustment. Manual focusing type Adjusts focus of the Auto focusing type Focus Adjustment sensor. yyAutomatic yyManual yyEntire Imaging Area Sets an imaging area. yyPartial Switches the digital zoom yyOFF (default value) Digital Zoom Imaging (Monochrome type only) to ON/OFF. yyON Area Resets the sensor to the Undo state before the settings were changed. Extended Applies the color filters if an Functions outline of a certain color cannot Unused (default value) / Color Filters be displayed when an image Red / Green / Blue / (Color type only) is displayed in monochrome Cyan / Magenta / Yellow display by the color type sensor. Switches to ON/OFF for yyON (default value) Lighting the built-in light. yyOFF Lighting Select a lighting mode for yyFlash (default value) Lighting Mode the built-in light. yyContinuous
A-6
4-11
4-11
4-13
4-17 4-18 4-16
4-18
4-19 4-19
Settings List
2 Master Registration
Menu Description Setting range yySettings yyDelete yyTest Reference page 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-25 Registers the image Register Live image as master imaged by sensor as a master image. Master Register image from image Registration history Register image from file location Extended Brightness Correction Functions Registers an image history stored in the sensor as a master image. Registers the image file (*.iva or *.ivp) as a master image. Sets a reference of brightness to the master image.
3 Tool Settings
Items Add Tool Window Shape Edit Window Description Newly sets a tool. Select the window shape to specify the area of a target to be detected. Specifies an area to search an outline of the target. By specifying a smaller area as a search area, the processing time will be shortened. Setting range yyRect (default value) yyCircle yyEntire (for no position adjustment) yyPartial yyHigh Sensitivity yyNormal Sensitivity (default value) yyLow Sensitivity yyUndo yyRedo yyClear yySize 0 to 100 (default value: 70) 0 to 180 (default value: 20) yyON (default value) yyOFF yyHigh Accuracy (default value) yyHigh Speed Reference page 4-31 4-35
Search Region
4-37
Fine Tune Outline Outline Limit Adjustment Tool name Extended Functions
An extraction sensitivity of Sensitivity an outline can be selected according to the target. Remove Outline Match Judges by disabling the unnecessary outlines which interrupt the stabilized detection. Adjusts a threshold used in the OK/NG judgment.
4-37
4-38 4-35 4-35 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-40

A-7
Live Displays the Test screen Adjustment and adjusts a threshold. Sets an arbitrary name to the tool. Rotation Range Margin Search Algorithm Sets a range of rotating direction to search an outline of the target. Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle. Select a detection mode of outline tool according to the target.
Settings List
Items Edit Window
Description Select the window shape to specify an area of the target to be extracted. When the window shape is set to [Rect], resets an angle of the window. Adds of a circular/ rectangular mask region in the tool window frame.
Setting range yyRect (default value) yyCircle yyEntire -
Reference page 4-44
Angle Reset
Add Mask Cut Mask Undo Clear Color Extraction (For color type) Color Area/Area
4-47 4-47 4-47 4-47
Mask
yyRect (default value) Adds a circular/rectangular yyCircle mask region for cutting the set mask region. The previous operation can be cancelled. Deletes a mask region which has been set. Click a color to be extracted on the master image and sets an extraction range. Click brightness to be extracted on the master image and sets an extraction range. Adjusts a threshold used in the OK/NG judgment. Set an upper limit of the threshold. When an upper limit setting is ON, select a threshold scale. Displays the Test screen and adjusts a threshold. Sets an arbitrary name to the tool. yyExtract Area [+] yyExtract Area [-] yyUndo yyClear yyto Live Image yyBrightness Range yyUndo yyClear yyto Live Image 0 to 100 (default value: 50) yyON yyOFF (default value) yy0 to 200 (default value) yy0 to 999 -
4-44
Brightness Extraction (For monochrome type) Match Upper Limit Scale Live Adjustment Tool name Advanced Color Extraction (Color type only) Extended Functions to Live Image Fixed Reference Area
4-44 4-44 4-48 4-48 4-44 4-49 4-51
Limit Adjustment
Specifies a color to be yyH : 0 to 359 extracted as HSB (H: Hue, yyS : 0 to 255 S: Saturation, B: Brightness). yyB : 0 to 255 Based on a set color extraction value, a color extraction condition can be confirmed in the Live image. -
4-51
Select a condition which yyDisable the matching rate of the yyEnable: Large Color Area/Area is 100%. yyEnable: Small
4-51
A-8
Settings List
Items Window Shape Edit Window Search Region
Description Select a window shape to specify a range of the target to be the position adjustment reference.
Setting range yyRect (default value) yyCircle
Reference page 4-55
Specifies an area to search a target to be a position yyEntire adjustment reference. By (for no position adjustment) specifying a smaller area as yyPartial a search area, the processing time will be shortened.
4-57
Fine Tune Outline
yyHigh Sensitivity An extraction sensitivity of yyNormal Sensitivity Sensitivity an outline can be selected (default value) according to a target. yyLow Sensitivity Remove Outline Unnecessary outlines which interrupts the steady position adjustments can be disabled. Adjusts a threshold which judges whether the position adjustment is succeeded or failed. yyUndo yyRedo yyClear yySize 0 to 100 (default value: 70) 0 to 180 (default value: 20) yyON (default value) yyOFF -
4-57
Position Adjustment Edit Copy Delete
4-58
Limit Adjustment
Match
4-55 4-55 4-59 4-59 4-31
Live Displays the Test screen Adjustment and adjusts a threshold. Rotation Range Margin Sets a range to adjust a position to the rotating direction. Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited angle. Edits settings of the tool which has already been set. Copies a tool which has been set and pastes it to the same position. This is for Outline tool and Color Area/Area tool. Deletes an unnecessary tool.
Extended Functions
4-32 4-32
A-9
Settings List
4 Output Assignment
Menu Description Setting range Reference page yyTotal Status yyTotal Status NG yyRUN Sets the output items to yyBUSY be assigned to the output yyError line. yyPosition Adjustment yyTool 01 to 16 yyLogic 1 to 4 yyOFF (not used) Selects whether to enable/ disable the output when the trigger error occurred. Selects a condition for the total status result. yyValid yyInvalid (default value) yyAll Tools OK yyAny Tools OK yyLogic 1 to 4
OUT1 to OUT4
4-61
Trigger Error
4-61
Total Status Conditions Extended Functions Logic Logic Settings (Logic 1 to 4) (Tool selection)
4-63 4-64 4-64
Selects the logical operation yyAND method of logics. yyOR Select tools to be assigned to the logic. yyUnused yyUsed yyUsed (Inverse)
A-10
Settings List
Program Details screen

Menu Copy Import from File Initialize (Program list) (Master image) Edit (Tool list) Change Program Description Copies the selected program to unregistered program. Imports a program from the batch backup file (*.iva). Initializes the program settings. Displays the master image of the currently selected program. Edits a program name. Displays the tools that are registered in the selected program. Changes to the selected program Setting range Reference page 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-11 6-9
Displays the program list. PROG_00 to PROG_31 -
A-11
Settings List
I/O Settings screen

Menu IN1 Input Assignment IN2 to IN6 Input Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save? Enable program switching through external input Output Output Type OUT1 to OUT4 Description Setting range Reference page 6-26
Sets a detection timing of yyExt. Trigger Rising the trigger input for IN1 (default value) input line. yyExt. Trigger Falling Sets a function to the input line IN2 to IN6. yyOFF (default value) yyProgram bit0 to bit4 yyClear Error yyExt. Master Save
6-26
Option
Sets whether or not to write data into the ROM yyOFF (default value) when the external master yyON image registration is performed. Sets whether to enable/ yyOFF (default value) disable the external input yyON switch programs function. Sets the output line settings (OUT1 to 4). Selects the output mode. Displays an input state of external input in real time. Confirms whether or not each OUT output is correctly output. Switches the polarity of the sensor. yyN.O. yyN.C. yyLatching (default value) yyOne-Shot OFF ON (default value) NPN PNP
6-26
6-26 6-27 6-27 6-28 6-28 6-28
Output Type Input Monitor
I/O Monitor Output Test I/O Polarity
A-12
Settings List
Advanced screen
Menu Device Settings Device Name Description Displays a device name and MAC address of the sensor. Changes the device name. Device name : 16 characters Setting range Reference page 6-31 6-31 6-32 6-32 6-32 6-32 6-32 6-33 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-34 6-35
Change Network Changes the network Settings settings of the sensor. IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway PORT Environmental Field Network Protocol Handshake Control Password Lock Security Displays the IP address of the sensor.
Displays the subnet mask 0.0.0.0 to of the sensor. 255.255.255.255 Displays the default gateway of the sensor. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Displays the port number 63000 (default value) of the sensor. yyDisable Selects the communication yyEtherNet/IP protocol for the sensor. yyPROFINET Enables/disables the yyEnable handshake control of data. yyDisable Sets the security of the sensor. yyOFF (default value) yyON -
Password, Inputs a password when Enter password the password lock is for confirmation turned on. Undo
Resets to the state before the new password was set. Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position for the auto focus common to all programs. yyIndividual (default value) yyCommon
Auto Focus Adjustment Position
A-13
Settings List
Menu FTP Client IP Address
Description
Setting range
Reference page 6-36
Transfers the image data and status result yyEnable information of the sensor yyDisable memory to an FTP server. Displays the IP address of the FTP server. -
6-36 6-36 6-36 6-36 6-36
Port Number Displays the port number. User Name FTP Destination Password Settings Passive Mode Connection Test Transfer Condition FTP Transfer Condition File Format Transfer Judgment Results FTP Error Folder File Name
Input the user name for Up to 16 characters can logging in to the FTP server. be set. Input the password for Up to 16 characters can logging in to the FTP server. be set. Enables/disables the passive mode. Tests the connection with the FTP server. Selects the transfer condition of image data. Selects the file saving format for image data. Transfers judgement results simultaneously with the image data. Turns ON the Error output function for when a file transfer failed. Displays the transfer destination folder. Sets the file name of the image data to be transferred. Input the upper limit of the numbers to be appended to file names. yyAll yyNG Only yyIVP yyBMP yyEnable yyDisable yyEnable yyDisable Up to 16 characters can be set. Up to 16 characters can be set. 0-65535 yyEnable yyDisable -
6-37 6-37 6-37 6-37 6-38 6-38 6-39 6-39 6-39
Transfer Destination Folder Index Upper Settings Limit Create Subfolder
Creates subfolders under yyEnable the transfer destination yyDisable folder.
A-14
Settings List
Menu Tilt Correction Adjustment Condition Settings Image Settings Setup Adjustment White Balance White Balance Settings Image Settings Image Display Direction Batch Backup
Description Shapes can be adjusted to the correct shape if a displayed image is distorted. Sets the adjustment conditions of a tilt correction.
Setting range yyOFF (default value) yyON yyVertical (default value) yyHorizontal
Reference page 6-40
6-40 6-40 6-42 6-42 6-42 6-43 6-21
Adjusts imaging for theTilt Same as Image Optimization Correction. Adjusts a white balance for the built-in camera of the sensor. Adjusts a white balance. Adjusts imaging for the White balance. Changes a display direction of an image. Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch. Transfers the settings data (batch backup file) saved in the PC to the sensor. yyOFF (default value) yyON Same as Image Optimization yyNormal (default value) yyRotate 180 -
Backup
6-23
Setting Transfer Options Initialize Sensor Update Sensor
Transfers the I/O polarity, yyEnable network settings and device (disabled after the transfer) name simultaneously with yyDisabled the settings data transfer. (default value) Initializes the sensor settings. Updates the operation software of the sensor. Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and device name of the sensor. -
6-23 3-10 6-44
Initialize/ Update
Sensor Information
6-44
A-15
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Symptom The PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor is lighting or blinking in red. Check point An error occurred. Check the errors for lighting or blinking in red. Is the power cable correctly connected? Is the voltage or capacity of the power source met the specification? Is the installed distance of the target correct? Remedy Refer to "Error Message". Reference page A-19 2-8 9-2
The power of the sensor does not turn on.
Connect the power cable correctly. Use a power source of the correct rating. Place a target at the correct installed distance. The installed distance is depending on the sensor type. Place the sensor in such a way that the sensor view matches the target size. Adjust the focusing position (focus) of the sensor. Adjust brightness of the sensor. Devise anti-vibration measures etc. Use brightness correction. Place the douser to prevent the incident of ambient light. Clean the front cover. Replace it with the spare front cover (OP-87461).
2-2
Is the sensor view correct? Is the focus adjustment correct? An image is not displayed on the IV-Navigator, or the image is abnormal. Is the brightness adjustment correct? Is the target or the sensor vibrating? Does the ambient light affect the image? Is the front cover dirty or damaged?
2-2 4-13 4-11 4-25 A-36 6-48 5-2
Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON]. Is the system in the setting mode? yyStart the run mode yyTurn on the power of the sensor again. If a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, input the external trigger. When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a nonvoltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables. Complete the settings in Settings Navigator.
The image or the status result is not updated.
Is the trigger correctly input?
2-8
All or part of the settings necessary for running have not been completed.
A-16
4-1
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Check point
Remedy
Reference page 6-48
Set the function of Update The status result is displayed Is the function of Update Image Image in the RUN mode to but the image is not. in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? [ON]. The network may be affected by the traffic in the in-plant LAN. Configure a local network and Is the network connected to the confirm the network connection only for the IV Series. in-plant LAN? Set the function of Update Image in the RUN mode to OFF. Is the input screen for the unlock password displayed? The password is lost and cannot unlock. Is the output line correctly connected? Is the output setting correctly set? Is the system in the setting mode? The status result is not output. Is the threshold correctly set? Is the tool correctly set? The password lock of the sensor is enabled. Input the unlock password. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office. Correctly connect to the control unit. Set the output line and output settings correctly in the Settings Navigator. Start the run mode Set the threshold correctly. yySet the detection tool correctly. yySet the position adjustment tool correctly. Set the NPN or PNP according to the circuits of the control unit.
Image update is slow. (during operation/settings)
6-48
6-34 2-8 4-60 5-2 5-14 4-30
IV-Navigator is not operated.
Is the Polarity correctly set?
6-28
Set the N.O. (normally open) Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly or N.C. (normally closed) according to the circuits of the set? control unit.
6-27
A-17
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Check point Is the trigger condition set to [External Trigger]? Is the input line correctly connected?
Remedy Select [External Trigger] in Trigger Options. Correctly connect to the control unit. Make the input line and input settings correctly in [Input Settings]. When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a non-voltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables. Place the check mark to the Enable program switching through external input check box. Correctly connect to the control unit. Set the input line and input settings correctly in [Input Settings]. When the NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a non-voltage input circuit. When the PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a voltage input circuit. Check the cables. Refer to Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor. Refer to Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable
Reference page 4-10 2-8 6-26
An external trigger cannot be input.
Has the input setting been made correctly set?
Has the Polarity been correctly set?
6-28
The program number cannot Has the switching method for be changed with the input the programs been correctly line. set? Has the input line been correctly connected? Has the input setting been correctly set?
6-26
2-8 6-26
Has the Polarity been correctly set?
6-28
IV-Navigator cannot be connect with sensor. Image data cannot be transferred via FTP.
Check the cables and settings. Check the cables and settings.
A-25 A-33
A-18
Error Messages
Error Messages
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor
The causes of, and remedies for, an error can be checked by observing the indicator light of the sensor.
PWR/ERR indicator light
PWR/ERR indicator status ON Green Blink
Cause In operation. Setting in progress. Operation stopped. A system error occurred. -
Remedy
yyTurn on the power of this device. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. yyInitialize the settings. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. yyThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the following procedures. yyNext normal trigger input yyClear Error input yySwitching the program number yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor yyDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status. yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value that is longer than the processing time. yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [Disable] described in output assignment for the Settings Navigator (Page 4-60). yyAn external master image registration error can be fixed using one of the following procedures. yySuccessful next external master image registration yyClearing the Error input yySwitching the program number yyProceeding to the settings screen for sensor yyTaking an image to be registered as a master image and register it as an external master image. yyDeleting one or more detection tools.
ON
A startup memory read error occurred. yyA data abnormality occurred due to noise or because the power switched OFF while writing was in progress. A trigger error occurred. A judgment process is not performed. yyIf a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, the external trigger will be input during a BUSY status. yyIf a target is to be imaged using an internal trigger, the trigger interval will become shorter than the processing time. An external master image registration error (without registered master image) occurred. The master image is not updated. yyThe image to be registered as a master image was not imaged. yyThe work memory is insufficient.
Red
Blink
A-19
Error Messages
PWR/ERR indicator status
Cause
Remedy
Red
Blink
The external master image registration error (with yyAn external master image registration error can be registered master image) fixed using one of the following procedures. occurred. The following errors occurred even though yySuccessful next external master image registration the image was updated and yyClearing the Error input registered as a master image. yySwitching the program number yyFor the new master image, yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor the outline cannot be yyChecking that the image to be registered and the extracted with the outline tool. detection tools/position adjustment settings are yyFor the new master image, applicable. the area cannot be extracted with the Color Area/Area tool. An FTP error occurred. The following errors occurred. yyConnection with the FTP server failed. yyTranfer to the transfer destination folder failed. yyThe transfer speed could not catch up the sensor processing speed. yyPower is not supplied to this device. yyDuring focusing position adjustment. (Manual focus type only) An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following procedures. yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen. yyClear Error input. yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.
OFF
yyConnect the power cable correctly. yyUse a power source of the correct rating. yyComplete the focusing position adjustment.
Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON. Cables (Page 2-8) 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
A-20
Error Messages
Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator

Message Sensor system error happens. Turn on sensor. If not turned on, contact local service center. Sensor internal memory reading has failed. Turn on or initialize sensor. After this message is closed, [Initialize] button will be displayed. Sensor program xx is damaged. Initialization is necessary. [Initialize] button will be displayed. Cause Remedy Output/ Indicator
A system error occurred yyTurn on the power of the sensor in the sensor. again. yyIt is conceivable that a yyIf the same error occurs, contact fault occurred inside the your nearest KEYENCE office. sensor. A memory read error occurred when the sensor started. yyA data trouble occurred. yyIt is conceivable that the power was switched OFF during writing, or noise was picked up. A memory read error occurred when the sensor started. yyA data trouble occurred during the execution of program number xx. yyIt is conceivable that the power was switched OFF during writing, or noise was picked up. A trigger error occurred. Judgment processing has not been executed. yyIf a target is to be imaged using an external trigger, the external trigger will be input during a BUSY status. yyIf a target is to be imaged using an internal trigger, the trigger interval will become shorter than the processing time. yyInitialize the settings following the instructions on the screen. yyTurn on the power of the sensor again. yyDo not turn OFF the power while saving the settings. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. yyInitialize the settings following the instructions on the screen. yyTurn on the power of the sensor again. yyDo not turn OFF the power while saving the settings. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
*1
*1
*1
Trigger error
yyAn trigger error can be fixed using one of the following procedures. yyNext normal trigger input yyClearing the Error input yySwitching the program number yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor yyDo not input the external trigger during a BUSY status. yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value that is longer than the processing time. yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [Disable] described in output assignment for the Settings Navigator (Page 4-60).
*2
A-21
Error Messages
Message Some tools can not correctly judge because of insufficient outline extraction amount as a result of Ext. Master Save. (Matching rate is 0.) Check tool configuration.
Cause
Remedy
Output/ Indicator
An external master image yyAn external master image registration error (with registration error can be fixed registered master image) using one of the following occurred. The following procedures. errors occurred even yySuccessful next external though the image was master image registration updated and registered yyClearing the Error input Some tools can not correctly as a master image. yySwitching the program number judged because area is 0 as a yyFor the new master yyProceeding to the settings result of Ext. Master Save. (Matching rate is 0.) image, the outline screen of the sensor Check tool configuration. cannot be extracted yyChecking that the image to be with the outline tool. registered and the detection tools/position adjustment Brightness of brightness adjustment yyFor the new master image, the area cannot settings are applicable. area is not adjustable as a result of be extracted with the yyAdjusting brightness of the Ext. Master Save. Color Area/Area tool. image to be registered properly. Check configuration of brightness yyThe brightness adjustment. correction cannot be performed correctly for the new master image. Outer master registration fails because image is not captured. An external master image yyAn external master image registration error can be fixed registration error (with no using one of the following registered master image) procedures. occurred. The master image is not updated. yySuccessful in next external master image registration yyThe image to be registered as a master yyClearing the Error input image was not imaged. yySwitching the program number yyThe work memory is yyProceeding to the settings insufficient. screen of the sensor yyTaking an image to be registered as a mater image and registering it as an external master image. yyDeleting one or more detection tools. An application failure occurred. yyReinstall the IV-Navigator (IV-H1). yyReplace the PC. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest KEYENCE office. yyRestart the PC. yyReinstall the IV-Navigator (IV-H1).
*2
A
Outer master registration fails because of lack of work memory.
*2
Application error happens.
Registry access fails.
A failure of the registry information occurred.
A-22
Error Messages
Message Network adapter not found
Cause
Remedy
Output/ Indicator
Remedy when the Refer to yyEthernet cable is not PC cannot be connected with the connected to the PC. yyThe network adapter is sensor (Page A-25). not correctly connected to the PC. Searching the sensor failed. Connection is not possible because data transmission to the sensor failed.
Sensor not found Data transfer to sensor fails.
Communication timeout to sensor Connection is not possible happens. because there is no response from the sensor. Network connection to sensor can Connection is not possible not be performed. because the IV-Navigator is not correctly connected with the sensor. Network connection to sensor can Connection is not possible not be performed. because the connection is not correctly nor directly connected with the sensor. Specified sensor is being Connection is not possible Disconnect the presently connected to other monitor or PC. because the specified connected monitor or PC and sensor is connected to then re-connect it. a different monitor or a different PC. Only one monitor or PC can be connected to a sensor at the same time. Writing in file fails. Saving the file to the specified saving destination has failed. Accessing to the specified file or folder failed. yySpecify the saving destination correctly. yyConfirm the access privileges of the saving destination. yyConfirm the access privileges of the saving destination. yyChange the attribute of the read-only folder.
Access to file or folder fails.
Disk space is insufficient.
Saving is not possible Delete a file to make an enough because the amount space for the saving destination. of free space in the specified saving destination is insufficient. The setting files for a different model of the sensors cannot be read. Read the setting files of a sensor of the same model.
This file configuration data is for xxxx. This file is not readable.
A-23
Error Messages
Message FTP Connection Error FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed) FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)
Cause Connection with the FTP server failed. Data transfer to the transfer destination folder failed. Data which is larger than the remaining storage of the FTP buffer has been created and the transfer failed.
Remedy Refer to Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable (Page A-33).
Output/ Indicator
*2
*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red), PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red) *2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red), PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red)
A-24
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor

Remedy when direct connection is unavailable
Status Remedy
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message. yyMount the network adapter correctly to the PC. yySet any IP address for the PC. Automatic IP address acquisition cannot be applied. Changing the PC settings (IP address setting) (Page 2-16) yySupply the power to the sensor. yyConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly with an Ethernet cable. Connecting directly (Page 2-11) Click the [Connection start] button after a correct connection. yyRestart the PC and turn on the sensor power again. If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings. Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) (Page A-35)
Connection is not possible even by clicking the [Direct Connection] button in the Activation Menu.
Connection became impossible after connection was established once. yyClick the [OK] button and close the message. yyConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly with an Ethernet cable. Connecting directly (Page 2-11) Click the [Connection start] button after correct connection. The network is connected to multiple sensors or computers and other network devices. yyIn the case of a network connection, change the configuration to network connection. Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection) (Page 3-6)
A-25
Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable

Status Remedy
Connection is not possible even by clicking the [Network Connection] button in the Activation Menu.
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message. yyMount the network adapter correctly to the PC. yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment. Connecting via network (Page 2-11) yyClick the [Search Sensor] button and search a sensor. Searching for a sensor to be connected (Page 3-7) If a connection is unavailable, refer to When the connection cannot be established by searching the sensor (Page A-27).
A
Connection is not possible even by clicking the [Connection start] button in the Network connection screen.
yyInput the IP address of the sensor to be connected and click the [Connection start] button to connect. Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address (Page 3-8) If a connection is unavailable, refer to When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor (Page A-28).
Connection became impossible after connection was established once.
A-26
Status
Remedy When the connection cannot be established by searching the sensor yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment. Connecting via network (Page 2-11) yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway. Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC (Page A-31) yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the PC or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor. Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection) (Page 3-6) Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor (Page A-31) Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) (Page A-35) yyThe following conditions are required for a successful sensor search. yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and PC are matched. yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address is not duplicated.
The sensor was not found using the [Search Sensor] button on the Network connection screen.
A-27
Status
Remedy When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment. yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment. Connecting via network (Page 2-11) yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor. yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, connect by the [Search Sensor] button. Searching for a sensor to be connected (Page 3-7) yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway. Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC (Page A-31) yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the PC or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway. Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor. Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection) (Page 3-6) Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor (Page A-31) Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) (Page A-35)
Connection is not possible even by inputting the IP address into the Network connection screen and clicking the [Connection start] button.
A-28
Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor

The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the LINK/ ACT indicator light and STATUS indicator light of the sensor..
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light

Displays the link status with the network.
LINK/ACT indicator light
Status of the LINK/ACT indicator light ON Green Blink
Status Correct link with the PC or the Ethernet switch.
Remedy
Link is normal. Correct link with the PC or the When connection with the IV-Navigator is not possible, Ethernet switch. check the STATUS indicator light. Data are being sent and received. No correct linking with the PC or the Ethernet switch. yySupply power to the sensor. yyPower is not supplied to this yySupply power to the PC or the Ethernet switch of the unit or the connection target. connection target. yyThe cable is not connected yyConnect the cable correctly. correctly.
OFF
A-29

Indicates the connection status within the IV-Navigator. Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS indicator light.
Status of the STATUS indicator light
Status Correct connection with the IV-Navigator. The connection with the IV-Navigator has been established by acquiring the IP address.
Remedy
ON
Green
Blink
No correct connection with the For direct connection monitor. Remedy when direct connection is unavailable The IP address of the (Page A-25) sensor has been acquired, For network connection but connection with the IV Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable Navigator has not been (Page A-26) established. For direct connection Remedy when direct connection is unavailable No correct connection with the (Page A-25) PC. The IP address of the sensor For network connection has not been acquired. Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable (Page A-26)
OFF
yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute. yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated or may not accept an operation with the STATUS indicator light turned on. yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected PC cannot be connected.
A-30
Other methods of confirming a network connection

Confirming the existence of the sensor from the PC
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can be confirmed by sending a ping command from the PC to the sensor to be connected.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC

yyFor details of confirming/setting the IP address of Changing the PC settings (IP the PC, refer to address setting) (Page 2-16). yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC/sensor/ other network device does not coincide with. Also, confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway are correctly set.
1 Select [All Programs] [Accessories]

The Command Prompt screen opens.
[Command Prompt] from the [Start] menu of Windows.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor

Directly connect the sensor and the PC, and confirm the IP address of the sensor. After returned to the network connection, set the confirmed IP address of the sensor and confirm whether the connection with the sensor is possible or not.
2 Input "ping(IP address of the sensor)" (
indicates a "space") and press the <Enter> key.
1 Directly connect the sensor and the PC of

If correctly connected with a target sensor zz
The responded time from the sensor (input IP address) will be displayed, and [0% loss] will be displayed. For Windows XP, [0% loss] will be displayed. A message which indicates a failure for sending the ping command will be displayed, and [100% loss] will be displayed. For Windows XP, [100% loss] will be displayed.
3 Confirm the sent result of the ping command.
the confirmation/setting target.
Connecting directly (Page 2-11) Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection) (Page 3-6)
2 Click the [Program] button.
If not connected with a target sensor zz
4 After the confirmation, close the

Command Prompt screen.
yyNote that when the ping command is executed to a device other than a sensor, the confirmation will succeed if there is a response to the ping command. yyConfirmation is not possible for a direct connection.
The IV-Navigator switches to the main screen in [Program].
A-31
7 After confirmation/setting are completed,

click the [OK] button and exit from the network settings.
8 Exit the IV-Navigator. 9 Connect the sensor and PC via a network.

The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
Connecting via network (Page 2-11) Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection) (Page 3-6)

the [Change Network Settings] button.
Confirming the router settings

When a router is used, confirm that the following port is opened. Sensor : 63000 (default value)
Network setting screen opens.
Confirm the IP address of the sensor.
For the setting methods of the sensor port number, refer to the following. Changing the network settings (Page 6-32) yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68. yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the server. It is generally 20 or 21. yyConfirm the firewall software on the PC whether the port is available or not.
A
yyWhen the IP address of the sensor is to be changed, set the arbitrary IP address and click the [OK] button. yyConfirm that the IP address of the sensor/PC/ other network device does not coincide with. Also, confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway are correctly set. yyWhen the [Reset] button is clicked, the setup values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default Gateway] will be reset and [Empty] will be displayed. [Port:] will be 63000.
Confirming the firewall settings

yyIf the Windows Security Alert dialog appears and the IV-Navigator is blocked by the Windows firewall, click the [Allow access] button (for Windows 7) or the [Unblock] button (for Windows XP). y y Confirm that an application or a port to be used is being enabled in the firewall software of the PC. For the port number to be allowed to use, refer to Confirming the router settings (Page A-32).
A-32
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable

Status Remedy yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it correctly. yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it correctly. yyMoreover, confirm the firewall software on the PC whether the port is available or not. yyConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly. yyConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly.
Connection with the FTP server failed.
FTP Destination (Page 6-36) yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the transfer destination folder and perform the operation again. yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a file with the same name exists, change the file name or change the transfer destination folder. Transfer destination folder (Page 6-36) yyWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the [Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program] screen after the transfer of untransferred data has finished.
Data transfer to the transfer destination folder failed.
If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will appear.
A-33
Status
Remedy yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor. Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8) yyConfirm the stress status of the network.
Data which is larger than the remaining storage of the FTP buffer has been created and the transfer failed.
A-34
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)

The network settings such as the IP address can be initialized to the factory default by means of the IP reset switch of the sensor. yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining the sensor used in another network to a new network, or when trouble occurs during connection. yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor. The connection will be interrupted.
Initializing the network settings
1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover

indicated by the mark.
Remove only the fixing screw of the front cover indicated by the mark. Do not remove the front cover.
Indicator light
Settings after initialization

Setting Items Communication speed IP address setting method IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Settings after initialization 100/10Mbps Automatically switches BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) 0.0.0.0*1, *2 0.0.0.0
*2
mark
2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in
0.0.0.0*2
diameter) into the screw hole and press the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds.
*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP client function can be used. Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP server or DHCP server except the IV-Navigator to be connected. *2 Becomes blank in the Network settings screen. Changing the network settings (Page 6-32)
A
Long and thin pin
Connecting method after initialization

For direct connection
Connects automatically with BOOTP. There is no need to set the IP address. Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection) (Page 3-6)
The STATUS indicator light will blink twice (orange) and then turn off. The network setting is initialized.
3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover.

yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm
For network connection

Search the sensor to be connected. A search will be made for a sensor without an IP address, set the IP address by following the instructions on the screen. Searching for a sensor to be connected (Page 3-7)
A-35
Maintenance
Maintenance
Replacing the front cover
The front cover can be replaced with the optional spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or damaged. Replace the front cover with the correct procedure by following the precautions below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67) may not be maintained. yyDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring. yyAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.
1 Remove the old front cover and the

O-shaped ring.
O-shaped ring (small) O-shaped ring (large)
A
O-shaped ring.
Front cover Dedicated screw
2 Install the front cover after embedding the

yyScrew: Dedicated screw 2 Use the attached dedicated screw. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm
O-shaped ring (small) O-shaped ring (large)
Dedicated screw Front cover
A-36
Maintenance
MEMO
A-37
Index
Index
Numerics
1. Image Optimization..........................................7-9 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)....4-6 2. Master Registration........................................7-10 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)........4-20 3. Tool Settings...................................................7-12 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28 4. Output Assignment.........................................7-13 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)...4-60
C
Cables..................................................................2-8 Cancelling One-Shot output.................................8-6 Capture..................................................... 6-48, 7-20 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-6 Change saved image file location......................6-48 Changing Over.....................................................8-7 Changing the logging conditions of the image history................................................6-20 Changing the network settings...........................6-32 Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)....2-16 For Windows 7..............................................2-16 For Windows XP...........................................2-16 Changing the saving destination of an image....6-22 Changing the timing of the status output..............8-6 Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor....... A-19 Checking the view and installed distance.............2-2 Check Statistics/Histogram in operation.............7-19 Clearing Errors...................................................8-10 Clearing the saved images.................................6-19 Color Area/Area tool...........................................4-42 Color filters (color type only)...............................4-18 Communication cables............................... 1-10, 9-8 Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator.... A-21 Confirming or deleting the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning......................................5-26 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC..... A-31 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor.......................................................... A-31 Confirming the existence of the sensor from the PC..................................... A-31 Confirming the firewall settings......................... A-32 Confirming the OK/NG images...........................5-26 Confirming the registration results in the test mode......................................................5-27 Confirming the router settings........................... A-32 Confirming the saving destination of an image....6-22 Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor......................... A-29 Connecting directly.............................................2-11 Connecting method after initialization............... A-35 For direct connection................................... A-35 For network connection............................... A-35 Connecting the Ethernet cable...........................2-12 Connecting the PC and multiple sensors.............1-3 Connecting the PC and single sensor..................1-2 Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor.....2-8 Connecting the sensor and the PC....................2-11 Connecting via network......................................2-11 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......8-2 Converting IVP data to BMP data.......................6-52
A
Achieving adequate image brightness...............5-30 If brightness cannot be adjusted due to uneven brightness........................................5-30 If brightness cannot be adjusted in the Auto Brightness Adjustment....................5-30 Achieving good focus.........................................5-31 If good focus cannot be achieved by the Auto Focus Adjustment...........................5-31 Adding a tool......................................................4-31 Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool..............4-31 Adjusting brightness...........................................4-12 Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)........5-33 Adjusting the installed distance (WD).................5-29 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14 Advanced screen............................................... A-13 Advanced Sensor Settings....................... 6-49, 7-21 Advanced settings for color extraction (for color type only).............................................4-51 Advanced settings for the sensor.......................6-30 Area tool.............................................................4-42 Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus type only).........................................6-35
B
Backing up in a batch.........................................6-21 Backing up the image history in a batch.............6-19 [Backup] tab.......................................................6-31 Basic adjustments........................... 5-34, 5-35, 5-36 Basic configurations of IV-Series..........................1-2 Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4 Basic Operation for Tools...................................3-11 Basic Operation of Simulator................................7-3 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3 Batch Backup........................................... 6-44, 6-45 Bracket.................................................................1-9 Brightness Adjustment........................................4-11 Brightness Adjustment settings..........................4-11 Brightness Correction.........................................4-25
A-38
Index
Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter....................................6-51 Copying a program.............................................6-12 Copying a tool....................................................4-32 Correcting the distorted images due to the installation..........................................................5-30 Cut-off process of the matching rate................... A-5
Extended Functions for the Position Adjustment tool...............................4-59 Extended functions items for the Output Assignment.......................................4-62 Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool.....................................4-50 External trigger.....................................................8-2
D
Default value......................................................4-61 Deleting a tool....................................................4-32 Deleting the OK/NG images...............................5-26 Deleting the software (uninstall).........................2-15 Description for symbols......................................8-12 Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)...............4-18 Disconnect..........................................................6-47 Displaying and outputting the status result.......... A-4 Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment........................ A-4 Displaying from the main screen in....................6-16 Displaying from the main screen in [Run]...........6-16 Displaying the Program Details screen.............. 6-11 Displaying the Sensors internal image history screen..........................................6-16 Displaying the statistical information..................5-10 Displaying the tool information...........................5-12 Display methods for tools.....................................5-7 For color type..................................................5-7 For monochrome type.....................................5-8 Dome attachment.................................................1-8
F
Field Network.....................................................6-33 [File] menu................................................ 6-45, 7-18 Finishing the Settings Navigator...........................4-5 Fit to Window......................................................6-47 Fixed Reference Area.........................................4-51 Flow of the internal process...............................5-37 Focus Adjustment...............................................4-13 Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type......4-13 Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type...................................4-14 Folder composition and file naming rules...........6-25 For the processing time......................................5-37 Front cover (for replacement)...............................1-9 FTP.....................................................................6-36 [FTP] tab.............................................................6-30
H
Hardware............................................................2-14 [Help] menu.............................................. 6-50, 7-21 Hiding the statistical information.........................5-11 Hiding the tool information..................................5-13
E
Editing a program name.....................................6-12 Editing a tool.......................................................4-31 Editing the tool window.......................................3-12 Enlarging the image display.................................5-6 Environmental....................................................6-31 [Environmental] tab............................................6-30 Error Messages................................................. A-19 Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).....................1-10 Exit........................................................... 6-46, 7-19 Exiting the sensor settings and starting an operation.............................................5-2 Exiting the Simulator............................................7-5 Export....................................................... 6-45, 7-18 Extended Functions for the Image Optimization......................................4-16 Extended Functions for the Master Registration......................................4-25 Extended Functions for the Outline tool.............4-39 Extended functions for the Output Assignment.......................................4-62
I
Image display direction.......................................6-43 [Image] menu........................................... 6-47, 7-20 Image Optimization............................................. A-6 Image while Running..........................................6-48 Imaging Area......................................................4-17 Imaging the target widely...................................5-29 Importing a program...........................................6-13 Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic.....................................8-5 Importing the Status Output.................................8-4 Importing the total status / total status NG output...........................................8-4 Infrared polarization filter attachment...................1-8 Initialization.........................................................3-10 Initialize Sensor........................................ 6-44, 6-47 [Initialize/Update] tab..........................................6-31 Initializing a program..........................................6-14 Initializing the network settings.......................... A-35 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-35
A-39
Index
Initializing the sensor..........................................3-10 Input circuit.........................................................2-10 Input Response Time.........................................8-12 Input Settings.....................................................6-26 Installation destination of the software (reference)..........................................................2-15 Installed distance of the dome attachment...........2-6 Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................2-14 Installing the IVP-Converter...............................6-51 Installing the sensor at an angle.........................5-32 Internal trigger......................................................8-3 I/O Monitor..........................................................6-28 I/O Polarity..........................................................6-28 I/O Settings............................................... 6-49, 7-21 I/O Settings screen............................................ A-12 Items of extended functions for the Master Registration......................................4-25 IV Sensor Simulation..........................................7-14 IV Software................................................. 1-10, 9-4
Master registration using the file saved in the PC................................................................4-23 When using batch backup files (*.iva)...........4-23 When using image capture files (*.ivp).........4-24 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5 Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator....7-19 Mounting adapter.................................................1-9 Mounting the attachment......................................2-6 Mounting the dome attachment............................2-6 Mounting the mounting adapter............................2-4 Mounting from the jig side...............................2-4 Mounting on the wall.......................................2-4 Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2 Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter...2-4
N
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-11 Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-11 Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program]..................................................5-4 NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable........................9-8 NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).............................................1-10 No-voltage input (When the NPN output is selected)....................2-10
J
Judgment processing flow....................................1-6
Language................................................. 6-49, 7-20 Lighting...............................................................4-19 LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............... A-29 List of the Useful Features...................................6-2 Loading and confirming the saved images.........6-17
O
Open file.............................................................7-18 Operating conditions..........................................2-14 Operating from the menu bar.............................6-45 Operating in the shortest cycle.............................8-3 Operating the image tool bar..............................3-11 Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..............5-16 Operation flow of the Simulator............................7-3 Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)..............................................3-6 Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)...........................................3-6 Operation for initial startup of the sensor.............3-9 Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning.....................5-17 Operation of the indicator light...........................1-12 Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on...........................................................8-11 Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5 Optional parts for the sensor................................1-8 OS......................................................................2-14 Other methods of confirming a network connection........................................ A-31 Outline tool.........................................................4-34 Output Assignment............................................ A-10 Output circuit......................................................2-10 Output Settings...................................................6-27
M
Main screen for the Image Optimization....... 4-7, 7-9 Main screen for the Master Registration.... 4-20, 7-10 Main screen for the Output Assignment..... 4-60, 7-13 Main screen for the Tool settings.............. 4-30, 7-12 Main screen in [Run] / [Program]..........................5-4 Main screen of the IVP Converter......................6-51 Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation...........7-14 For Color Area/Area tool...............................7-16 For Outline/Position Adjustment tool.............7-14 Main screen of the Simulator................................7-6 Maintenance...................................................... A-36 Manual Trigger...................................................6-48 Manual trigger button.........................................6-48 Margin...................................................... 4-40, 4-59 Mask settings.....................................................4-47 Master Registration............................................. A-7 Master registration from the image history in the sensor...........................................................4-22
A-40
Index
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4 Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2 Overview of the program functions.......................6-6 Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]........5-3
S
Save...................................................................7-18 Save Image........................................................6-48 Save Program Settings List................................7-18 Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation......7-18 Saving all the image histories individually..........6-18 Saving images and screens displayed on the IV-Navigator individually...............................6-22 Saving procedure...............................................6-22 Saving the batch backup file................................7-3 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images............6-21 Saving the sensor settings or the image history....6-21 Screenshot.........................................................3-11 Search Algorithm................................................4-40 Searching for a sensor to be connected...............3-7 Security..............................................................6-34 Selecting a display method for tools.....................5-7 Selecting a tool according to its intended purpose...........................................4-28 Selecting the tool................................................5-38 Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image........5-6 Selecting the tool from the status gauge..............5-6 Selecting the tool whose information to be displayed.........................................................5-6 Sensor.........................................................1-8, 1-11 Sensor Information.............................................6-44 [Sensor Information] tab.....................................6-31 [Sensor] menu....................................................6-47 Sensors Internal Image History............... 6-49, 7-21 Sensors Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG).............6-15 Sensor Update...................................................6-47 Setting a device name........................................6-31 Setting a search region............................ 4-37, 4-57 Setting a sensitivity................................... 4-37, 4-57 Setting a tool name............................................4-38 Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool..........4-42 Setting items for the Outline tool........................4-34 Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool....4-54 Setting Logics.....................................................4-64 [Setting] menu.......................................... 6-48, 7-20 Setting range of the Output Assignment.............4-61 Settings after initialization.................................. A-35 Settings for disabling outlines................... 4-38, 4-58 Settings for the Trigger Options............................4-8 Settings List......................................................... A-6 Settings Navigator................................................4-2 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow............................................... 4-4, 7-8 Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen.......... A-6 Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation).....7-8 Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor..........................................................6-30
A-41
P
Polarized visible light filter attachment.................1-8 Polarizing filter attachment...................................9-7 Position Adjustment tool.....................................4-53 Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - stranded wire).......1-9 Preparing the program functions..........................6-7 Processing during an operation..........................5-33 Program Details........................................ 6-49, 7-21 Program Details screen..................................... A-11 Program Settings List.........................................6-45
R
Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......5-33 Reducing the image blur....................................5-31 Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal surface......................................................5-32 Registering the image files saved in the PC.......5-23 Registering the images from the image history saved in the sensor................5-21 Registering the Live image as a master image....4-21 Registering the master image...................4-21, 7-11 Registering the Master Image..............................8-8 Registering the OK/NG images to be used for the Tool Auto Tuning...........................................5-19 Register the images taken with the sensor........5-19 Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable.................................... A-26 Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable............................................. A-33 Remedy when direct connection is unavailable.... A-25 Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor.................................................. A-25 Replacing the front cover.................................. A-36 Required environment for the PC to be connected......................................2-14 Reset Statistics...................................................6-47 Resetting to the Factory Default Settings...........3-10 Response time for the error clear input..............8-12 Response time for the external master registration input.................8-12 Response time for the switch program input......8-12 Rotation Range........................................ 4-39, 4-59
Index
Setting the Color Area/Area tool.........................4-44 Setting the Image Optimization............................4-6 Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor.......................6-26 Setting the Outline tool.......................................4-35 Setting the Output Assignment...........................4-61 Setting the password lock..................................6-34 Setting the position adjustment tool...................4-55 Setting the tool name.........................................4-49 Setting the Total Status Conditions.....................4-63 Setting the Trigger Options......................... 4-8, 4-10 Setting the upper limit.........................................4-48 Setting up the PC...............................................2-14 [Setup Adjustment ] tab......................................6-30 Shortening the imaging processing time............5-38 Shortening the Processing Time........................5-37 Shortening the processing time of each tool......5-38 Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area tool.....................................5-39 Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool...................................................5-38 Shortening the processing time of the position adjustment......................................5-39 Show saved image file location..........................6-48 Simulator..............................................................7-2 Simulator screen and operation flow....................7-4 Specification of the circuit and current of the sensor...........................................................2-10 Specifications.......................................................9-2 Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address............................................................3-8 Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position.............................5-33 Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool....................5-36 If the area search becomes unstable due to unwanted colors being extracted.......5-36 If the color you wish to judge cannot be extracted..................................................5-36 Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-29 Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image of the target.......................5-29 Stabilizing the Outline tool..................................5-35 If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outline other than the target.....................................5-35 If the match rate difference between the high and low-quality-targets is small.......5-36 If the outline cannot be detected when the target becomes out of position................5-35 If the outline of the target cannot be detected........................................................5-36 If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected......................5-36
A-42
Stabilizing the position adjustment.....................5-34 If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected.......................................5-35 If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the effect of the unwanted outlines.........................................................5-34 If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes unstable......................5-34 Starting an Operation...........................................5-2 Starting the IV-Navigator......................................3-6 Starting the IV Sensor Simulation......................7-17 Starting the Settings Navigator.............................4-3 Starting the Simulator...........................................7-4 Starting up the IVP-Converter............................6-51 Statistics.............................................................6-46 Statistics/Histogram Data...................................6-45 STATUS indicator light....................................... A-30 Status table......................................................... A-2 System Configuration...........................................1-2
T
Terminate IV-Simulator.......................................7-19 The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-16 Things can be performed with the program functions...............................................................6-6 Tilt Correction.....................................................6-40 Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15 Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration information..................5-27 Tool Data............................................................6-46 Tool Display Options................................. 6-47, 7-20 Tool settings.......................................................5-33 Tool Settings........................................................ A-7 Transfer Program Settings....................... 6-44, 6-45 Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor...........................................................6-23 Transferring to the sensor....................................7-5 Trigger number...................................................5-10 Troubleshooting................................................. A-16 Turning on the power and starting an operation....5-2 Types of tools.....................................................4-28
U
Update Sensor...................................................6-44 Useful features during installation/adjustment......6-3 Useful features while running...............................6-2 Users Manual.......................................... 6-50, 7-21 Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment...............5-32 Using the digital zooming function......................5-29 Using the dome attachment....................... 2-6, 5-32 Using the image files saved in the PC................5-15 Using the image history saved in the sensor......5-15
Index
Using the images taken in the Test mode...........5-15 Using the polarizing filter attachment......... 2-7, 5-32 Using the program functions (changing over)......6-9 When switching the program by the external input..........................................6-10 When switching the program in the main screen in [Run].................................6-9 When switching the program in the Program Details screen............................6-9 Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)...........1-5 Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................1-4
V
Version information................................... 6-50, 7-21 [View] menu.............................................. 6-46, 7-19 Voltage input (When the PNP output is selected)....................2-10
W
When the NPN output is selected......................2-10 When the PNP output is selected.......................2-10 White Balance (for color type only)....................6-42 [Window] menu......................................... 6-49, 7-21
Z
Zoom........................................................ 6-47, 7-20 Zoom In..............................................................6-47 Zoom Out...........................................................6-47
A-43
Revision history
Revision history Edition number January, 2012 August, 2012 1st edition 2nd edition Addition of screw hole (1/4-20UNC) to the mounting adapter. Compatibility with German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional). Addition of the Simulator function. Correction of the 2. of the Software License Agreement Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean. Addition of Logic output / Total Status NG output / RUN output. Addition of the FTP client function. Compatibility with field networks (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET). Addition of the IVP-Convertor. Revision details
December, 2012
4th edition
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted. (2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyers responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products. (3) The Products and any samples (Products/Samples) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples. (4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply. BUYERS TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2012 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244003E 1122-4 207GB Printed in Japan

Iv-Series-Pcsoft Um 207GB 244003 e 1122-4 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Iv-Series-Pcsoft Um 207GB 244003 e 1122-4 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

207GB

Getting Started Installation and Connection Basic Operation Settings Navigator

(Setting the Judgment Condition)

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

Safety Information for IV Series

Safety Information for IV Series

Safety precautions on LED product

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) zz

Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) zz

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Software License Agreement

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Version of the IV Series

Version of the IV Series

Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Structure of This Manual

Structure of This Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

Installation and Connection Basic Operation

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Chapter 2 Installation and Connection

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Chapter 6 Useful Features/Various Functions

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Basic configurations of IV-Series

Ethernet cable (2m/5m/10m)

Sensor IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Connecting the PC and multiple sensors

Ethernet switch Ethernet cable (2m/5m/10m)

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Judgment processing flow

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Checking the Package Contents

Checking the Package Contents 1

Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1

Flathead screwdriver x 1 (Manual focus type only) Instruction Manual x 1

Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment 1 Using the dome attachment (Page 2-6)